The Chung Collection

Chung Logo

The Chung Collection

INCAN small coastal vessels and postal tugs Canadian Pacific Railway. British Columbia Coast Steamship Service 1975

Item Metadata

Download

Media
chungtext-1.0362629.pdf
Metadata
JSON: chungtext-1.0362629.json
JSON-LD: chungtext-1.0362629-ld.json
RDF/XML (Pretty): chungtext-1.0362629-rdf.xml
RDF/JSON: chungtext-1.0362629-rdf.json
Turtle: chungtext-1.0362629-turtle.txt
N-Triples: chungtext-1.0362629-rdf-ntriples.txt
Original Record: chungtext-1.0362629-source.json
Full Text
chungtext-1.0362629-fulltext.txt
Citation
chungtext-1.0362629.ris

Full Text

 yr;' '
INSTALLATION
FIIECTM 6367X
DATEFeb. 5/76
KIDDE CARBON  DIOXIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM
PROTECTION FOR
ENGINE RM & CARGO HOLD
HULL 212
INCAN SHIPS LIMITED
PLEASE REFER IN CORRESPONDENCE TO ABOVE CONTRACT NUMBER
SPACE ABOVE RESERVED FOR APPROVAL
GENERAL TAILE OF COITENTS
DRAWING NO. TITLE
CR 250070 Diagrammatic Piping Layout
SUPPLEMENTARY DRAWINGS
CL-802
L-5849
L-34444
L-75442
L-77375
L-82120
L-82134
L-82343
L-84720
L-84729
L-85105
L-85643
L-85646
L-615410
803807
L-66663
L-85205
L-85206
fc- 85262
P*
Walter Kldde & Company of Canccla Ltd.
Montreal  • Toronto  • Yaaeeave?
Sales and Serrice Agencies hi Priacifje* Citiaa
 CAUTION:
1:
2:
3:
You are working with a high pressure system involving pressures in excess
of 800 p.s.i., therefore, exercise care at all times.
Install discharge head part number 872450 only after cylinders have been
anchored firmly in place.  Also in the case of automatic systems, check
that control heads are in set position before assembling.
All wiring is to be done ,in accordance with the electrical code and where
it is subject to heat or flame, a flame proof wire must be used.
NOTES:-
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
8
9
10
11
Pipe and fittings conveying carbon dioxide to be in accordance with spec.
L-5849.
Pipe and fittings between strainer stop check valves and opposed nozzles
in tank hatches to be brass.
Protect all pipe against possible damage.
1/8" control cables to be led in 3/8" std.wt.galv. steel pipe using
corner pulleys at all changes in direction.  No bends or off sets
permitted in control lines.
Where floor plates exist, nozzles to be located approx. 1/3 height between
floor and deck over (unless otherwise noted).
- Cylinder location suitably ventilated to prevent a temperature in excess
of 130 degrees F.
Cylinder foundation (by installer) to be level and designed to support a
unit weight of approximately - 300 lbs. per cylinder (100# cyls.)
250 lbs. per cylinder ( 75# cyls.)
200 lbs. per cylinder ( 50# cyls.)
2" x 2" x 1/4" supporting angle for cylinder racks (by installer) securely
fastened to ship's structure.
1%" angle over cylinder s (by installer) for weighing device.
Mechanical ventilation in engine room shut down on operation of system
through a pressure operated switch preferably located outside of but
close to space protected for convenient reset (wiring supplied & installed by others).
Procedure for pressure tests of installed piping Dwg. L-82120.
ASSEMBLY NO.
MRK
REVISION
DATE
CHK.
FRACTIONAL DIM.
. 1/64"  DECIMAL DIM._ .OOS"   UNLESS  OTHERWISE  NOTED
Welter Kldde & Co. of Canada Ltd.
Montreal Canada
Title:     Special Notes
Marine Systems.
MATERIAL
FINISH
MACHINE FINISHES
f I  ROUGH FILE OR GRINO
f2 REMOVE FINS. BURRS
fs  ROUGH  MACHINE
f* SMOOTH MACHINE
f 8  POLISHED SURFACE
SCALE
DRAWN   CH-K-D
DATE
April   14/69
CL-802
 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR
PIPE & FITTINGS CONVEYING HIGH PRESSURE CARBON DIOXIDE
(APPLIES TO ALL PIPE & FITTINGS THROUGHOUT
THE SYSTEM)
GENERAL :
1 . All pipe and fittings to have a minimum bursting pressure
(not working pressure) of 6,000 lbs. per square inch.
2. Threads on all pipe and fittings are to be taper threads
conforming toA.S.A.  Specification B-2.
STEEL PIPE & FITTINGS.
1 . Pipe in all sizes up to and including 3/4" may be standard weight.
(Schedule 40).
PIPE larger than 3/4" is to be extra heavy. (Schedule 80).
PIPE to conform to A.S.T.M. Specification A-53.
2. SCREWED FITTINGS (TEES,  ELLS, CROSSES, COUPLINGS)
in all sizes up to and including 3/4" may be std. wt.  150 lb. banded
malleable iron or steel.
SCREWED FITTINGS   (except unions) larger than 2" are to be
3000 lbs. forged steel (black) or 2000 lbs. cast steel.
UNIONS in sizes 1/2" to 3/4"   inclusive may be 150 lb. std. wt.
malleable iron or steel.
UNIONS in sizes 1 " to 2 "  inclusive may be 300 lbs. extra heavy
malleable iron or steel.
UNIONS larger than 2" are to be 600 lbs., American Standard forged
steel companion flanges, faced for ring   joint gasket.
3. FLANGED FITTINGS,  if used, shall be 600 lbs. American Standard,
forged carbon steel, faced for ring joint gasket.
4. In mildly corrosive atmosphere, steel pipe and fittings shall be
galvanized inside and out.
In severly corrosive atmosphere special corrosion - resistant
material or coatings may be required.
ASSEMBLY NO.
Q
<F
revised Spec,
REVISION
• eb 3
BY DATE        CHK
dJl
FRACTIONAL DIM._l/e4" DECIMAL DIM..it .OOS"   UNLESS   OTHERWISE   NOTED
Walter Kldde & Co. of Canada Ltd.
Montreal Canada
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR PIPE & FITTINGS
CONVEYING HIGH PRESSURE
CARBON  DIOXIDE
MATERIAL
FINISH
MACHINE FINISHES
f I  ROUGH FILE OR GRIND
fa REMOVE FINS . BURRS
fs ROUGH  MACHINE
f 4 SMOOTH MACHINE
f 8 POLISHED SURFACE
SCALE
DRAWN    CH'K'D
DATE
July 31/73
Page 1/4
L-5849-Q
 r
4. BUSHINGS,   if odd-sizes   reducing  fittings  are  not available,
flush  bushings  shall  not be  used.     When  hex bushings  are  used,
more  than  one   pipe  size   reduction   is   recommended  to   provide
adequate   strength.     Use   hex  steel  bushings  for a  reduction
greater than  two sizes.
5. Gaskets  for flanged  fittings shall  be  American  Standard   ring
joint soft  iron,   oval  type.
BRASS   PIPE   &   FITTINGS   (May be  used  only in  sizes  up to and  including
2").
1 . BRASS   PIPE  in all  sizes  up to and  including  3/4"  may be
standard weight.
BRASS   PIPE   in  sizes  from   1"  to 2"  inclusive  shall  be extra
heavy.
2. oRONZE   FITTINGS   in  all  sizes  up  to and   including   1" are   to
be extra heavy.
BRONZE   FITTINGS  (except unions) larger than   1 " are  to be
double extra heavy and  made  from the  250 lb.   cast  iron   pattern.
UNIONS  larger than   1" are to be extra heavy companion  flange
type.     (NOTE:  - Extra heavy bronze  screwed  fittings  in  sizes  up
to and  including  2",   are  considered satisfactory  in  the  distributing  piptng between  the   manifold  and the  discharge  nozzles  or if
the  system  contains  stop valves,  between the  stop valve  and
discharge  nozzles.     For approved suppliers use  those  listed  as
suppliers  of bronze  screwed fittings  in sizes  up to and  including
1").
APPROVED   FITTINGS:
1 . We  have  tested the  following  types  of fittings  and have  found
them  to be  satisfactory.
STEEL   & MALLEABLE   IRON:
Tees,   ells,   crosses  and couplings  (Screwed  Type) in sizes  up
to 3/4"  inclusive   -   150 lb.   W.S.P.   Banded,   Malleable   Iron,
(Crane   Flagg,   Brabler,  Walworth,   Malleable   Iron  Fitting
Co.,   Stockham).
ASSEMBLY NO.
REVISION
BY DATE        CHK
FRACTIONAL DIM.lt.l/64"   DECIMAL DIM.i .OOS"   UNLESS   OTHERWISE   NOTED
Walter Kldde & Co. of Canada Ltd.
Montreal Canada
MATERIAL
FINISH
MACHINE FINISHES
f I ROUGH PILE OR GRIND
fz  REMOVE FINS . BURRS
fa  ROUGH  MACHINE
f 4  SMOOTH MACHINE
f S  POLISHED SURFACE
SCALE
DRAWN
CH'K'D
Jb
Page   2/4
L-5849-Q
 In Sizes from 1 " to 2" inclusive - 300 lb. A.A.R. Malleable Iron
(Crane,  Flagg, Grabler, Stockham, Walworth^ Malleable Iron
Fitting Co.)
In sizes from 2 1/2" to 6" inclusive, forged steel, 3000lbs. W.O.G.
Black (Crane, Vogt, Watson, Stillman)
CAST STEEL,  2000 lbs. W.O.G. Gal v.      (Crane, Walworth)
UNIONS ( SCREWED TYPE )
In sizes 1/2" to 3/4" inclusive (Bronze to steel seats preferred)
Malleable Iron,  150 lbs. W.S.P. (Crane,  Flagg, Grabler,
Walworth, Malleable Iron Fitting Co., Stockham).
In sizes   I " to 2" inclusive (Bronze to steel seats preferred)
Malleable Iron,  2300 lbs . W.S.P. (Flagg,  Stockham)
Forged Steel, 3000 lbs. W.O.G. Black   (Catawissa)
Unions (Companion Flanges - Threaded - Faced for oval type ring
joint gasket)
In sizes from 2 1/2" to 6" inclusive, 600 lb.  Forged steel, black
(Crane, Walworth)
In sizes up to 3" inclusive,  1500 lb.  Flanged Union,  Forged steel,
black (Vogt)
BRONZE:
Tees, Ells, Crosses, and couplings (Screwed Type)
In sizes up to 1 " inclusive - extra heavy bronze (Crane,  Flagg,
Walworth)
In sizes 1   1/4" to 2" inclusive - double extra heavy bronze (made
from 250 lb. cast iron pattern)   (Crane,  Flagg)
Unions (Screwed Type)
In sizes up to 1 " inclusive, extra'heavy bronze (Crane,  Flagg, Walworth)
ASSEMBLY No.
MRK
REVISION
DATE
FRACTIONAL DlM.ZtLl/84"  DECIMAL D\».^Z .OOS"   UNLESS   OTHERWISE   NOTED
Walter Kldde & Co. of Canada Ltd.
Montreal Canada
MATERIAL
FINISH
MACHINE FINISHES
f I ROUGH FILE OR GRIND
fZ REMOVE FINS A BURRS
f 3  ROUGH MACHINE
f 4 SMOOTH MACHINE
f 8  POLISHED SURFACE
DRAWN
CH'K'D
A
-rO
DATE
Page 3/4
L-5849-Q
 Unions (Companion Flanges - Threaded)
In sizes 1  1/4" and 1   1/2" - 300 lbs. extra heavy bronze
(Crane, Walworth)
In 2" size - Double extra heavy bronze, (made from 800 lbs. ferro-
steel flange pattern no. 855H)   (Crane)
GASKETS
For flanged fittings shall be American Standard ring joint, soft
iron, oval type.
WHERE WALTER KIDDE & COMPANY INC SUPPLIES PIPE AND FITTINGS,
THOSE LISTED ABOVE OR ANY OTHER MAKE OR TYPE WHICH HAS
BEEN  FOUND SATISFACTORY BY TEST,  SHALL BE SUPPLIED.
ASSEMBLY No.
MRK
REVISION
BY
DATE
CHK.
FRACTIONAL DIM.
. l/*4"  DECIMAL D!M._ .OOS"   UNLESS OTHERWISE  NOTED
Walter KBdd© * Co. ef Canada Ltd.
MATERIAL
FINISH
MACHINE FINISHES
f I ROUOH FILE OR GRIND
f* REMOVE FIN. • BURRS
fa ROU.H MACHINE
f 4 SMOOTH MACHINE
f S POLISHED SURFACE
SCALE
DRAWN   CH'K'D
J
DATE
Page 4/4
L-5849-P
n.w.c.u  tea* i«»-n-*4
 W. K.     TYPE   'M    &   THROAT
-No   ARE    STAMPED   ON   HEX
1-3/8" HEX.-3/U" I .P.S. TAPER
PIPE THREAD
THROAT-TOBIN BRONZE
ORIFICE -NUMBER   STAMPED
) ON  THROAT  BASE   INDICATES
NOZZLE SIZE.
9-1/2"
B
<F
ORIFICE NO.NOTE  REVISED
IDENTIFICATION
STAMPING   ADDED
REVISION
M.FT.
RM.
3-63
7-62
BY        DATE    chVd
i
c
FRACTIONAL DIM. 5 l/64"    DECIMAL PIM.± .005" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
MATERIAL FINISH
5/64"  STAMPED STEEL
STD. PART NO.
CODE NO.
RED PAINT
ASSEMBLY NOT
KIODE CARBON   DIOXIDE  FIRE  EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
Welter Kidde & Company Inc.
Belleville, New Jersey.
INSTALLATION  DRAMNG
MULTIJET    NOZZLE
3/4"  SUPPLY
TYPE   'M'
MACHINE FINISHES
f   1   ROUGH FILE OR GRIND
f 2 REMOVE  FINS & BURRS
f 3  ROUGH  MACHINE
f 4  SMOOTH  MACHINE
f S POLISHED SURFACE
SCALE
HALF SIZE
DRAWN
M
H K I
zl
DATE
11-20-«*7
REV.
L-34444-B
 f
*
f	
3" CLEARANCE TO REMOVE HOOK
5'-7" FROM BOTTOM
OF 50 LB.  CYLINDER
6'-0H FROM  BOTTOM
OF 75 LB.   CYLINDER
6'-2" FROM   BOTTOM
OF 100 LB. CYLINDER
note:
21"-NOT INCLUDING
CLEARANCE   FOR OPERATOR
I l/g CONTINUOUS    ANGLE
INSTALL   WITH   TOE OF
ANGLE   IN   LINE   WITH
CENTERLINE OF CYLINDER
ADJUSTMENT   SLEEVE
JV
•nj
YOKE
CYLINDER
AISLE   SPACE
DRAWINGS
•INITIAL   POSITION
FINAL    POSITION
8'/4   DIA. WEIGHING   SCALE-
ROTATED 90° FOR CLEARNESS
POINTER INITIAL   POSITION
FINGER   GRIP RING
TO WEIGH   CYLINDERS-LOOSEN FRONT CLAMPS,
PLACE  YOKE UNDER  DISCHARGE  HEAD MAKING
SURE  THAT LEVER IS IN INITIAL POSITION.PULL
DOWN UNTIL CYLINDER IS OFF FLOOR a LEVER IS
IN FINAL  POSITION FOR CORRECT SCALE   READING
B
GENERAL   REVISION
REVISED a REDRAWN
REVISION
TAG
CH'K'O
T. K.
ATP-D
CFRESfl
S'*
W.K.
Vh
v%
46
BY     DATE CH'K'D
u-
3M- I'-O'
ISSUED   ON
WslUr   Kldde V Csnpanjr,  Ins.
BELLEVILLE , NEW   JERSEY
TYPICAL   INSTALLATION
WEIGHING  DEVICE
FOR
PRESSURE OPERATED  EQUIP'T
12 -12-45
L-66663   -B
 F\
l\i
sV
DRAWINGS
NAME
PLATE
T7r>
FOR  FIRE       *
?EAK GLASS^^^^PULL HANDLE
^K
((    KDlpPULL  HARD||^Pj
WALTER   KIDDE a COMPANY.INC.
BELLEVILLE,NEW JERSEY
B
vfe
1246-1600 —L0CKWASHER(4)-BR0NZE
1233-1600-HEX NUT (4)- BRASS
1236-1608 - MACRSCREW(4)-BRASS
2II43-NAMEPLATE   BRACKET (2J-BRASS
800450 - HAMMER a CHAIN - BRASS
75998-BODY-ALUMINUM ALLOY
I3I0-7I04-DRIVE SCREW       -STEEL
CONTROL  CABLE
2-HOLES FOR  '/4
FL.HD.MTG. SCREWS
3/8 TAPER PIPE THD
CABLE FASTENER.
34613 -FOR 1/8 CABLE - ST. ST.
801964    -FOR    1/16   CA BLE "ALUMINUM
2700II-C0VEK-ALUMINUM ALLOY
1709-0606-COVER SCREW (4)-M0NEL
928103- BREAK  GLASS
803246-HANDLE-BRONZE
60532 —BRACKET-STEEL
(OPTIONAL AS REQUIRED)
3-HOLES FOR J,"'
MOUNTING BOLTS
NOTE
MOUNT PULL BOX IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION AND
APPROXIMATELY 4' TO 5' FROM FLOOR.
TO INSTALL CABLE-THREAD IT THRU HOLES
IN FASTENER-ALLOWING SHORT   END TO
PROJECT AT LEAST '/2".-SEAT  CABLE  IN
GROOVE  BY PULLING   ON LONG  END,  THEN
SCREW  FASTENER AND CABLE INTO  HANDLE.
SECTION A-A
801964-1/16"CABLE FASTENER Jp
-ALUM. WAS   934617 - BRASS    " r
REVISION
J.C.M.
H
BY      DATE   CHTD
■C.
KIDDE CARBON DIOXIDE
FIRE   EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
Walter 3.1**. m CMsnr, Ins.
BetltrilU.New Jersey
INSTALLATION  OF
BREAK GLASS  PULL-BOX
SURFACE TYPE
9-16-26     L-75442-0
 ©
PIPING TO BE INSTALLED SECURELY-HOLDING COMBINATION
SMOKE ACCUMULATOR   AND GAS   OUTLET  FIRMLY
AGAINST  UNDERSIDE OF OVERHEAD  DECK
LOCATE PIPE CLAMP CLOSE TO COMBINATION
SMOKE ACCUMULATOR AND GAS OUTLET
SMOKE ——
GAS ---
i   IRS.  TAPER   PIPE   THREAD
IF POSSIBLE  PITCH PIPING  FOR DRAINAGE OF MOISTURE
OUT OF COMBINATION SMOKE ACCUMULATOR AND GAS OUTLET.
IN ALL CASES COMBINATION  SMOKE ACCUMULATOR AND GAS
OUTLET MUST BE INSTALLED HARD AGAINST  UNDERSIDE
OF DECK AND BETWEEN DECK   BEAMS.
COMBINATION SMOKE ACCUMULATOR
AND GAS OUTLET
g DRAINAGE     HOLE     LOCATED    HERE.
NO    POINT ON  OVERHEAD    DECK    MAY    BE   BEYOND    40 FT.   RADIUS
REVISION
REDESIGNED  S  REDRAWN
K
XL.
WAITER   KIDDE    &   COMPANY, INC.
60    WEST ST
BLOOMFIELO. NEW JERSEY
COMBINATION    SMOKE
ACCUMULATOR      AND
'     GAS   OUTLET
METHOD OF INSTALLING
OH.
mtr
&
7mr
\fur,
D
77375-B
 CARBON DIOXIDE SUPplv lINE
AIR OR NITROGEN
CARBON DIOXI0E
DISTRIBUTING VALVE
DISIRIBUTING LINE
NOZZLE PIPING OR
PERFORATED BILGE PIPING
PIPE CA?S AT
ENDS OF LINES
TEST of PIPING Detween CYLINDER BATTERY and VALVES
(IOOO IDs. per sq. in.)
Remove all discharge loops and plug all
the manifold openings except one which
may be used for the testing connection.
(Duplication of work will De avoided if
arrangements can be made to test the piping
before the loops are installed.)
Connect high pressure testcyl inders, high
pressure shut-off valve and high pressure
gauge into cyl inder manifold. If the system
is equipped with check valves used to effect
a partial discharge of the cylinder Dank,
make sure the test connection is made so
that test pressure can reach alI manifolds.
(To obtain the 1000 lb. test pressure, the
test cylinders shouldconsist of carbon dioxide cylinders used in conjunction with
high pressure air or nitrogen cylinders
for 'topping off". Oxygen cylinders must
never be used. Also, the heating of, any
compressed gas cylInder in order to increase
pressure is dangerous and is not recommended .)
Bio* carbon dioxide supply line to valve
manifold clear of foreign matter.
Make sure a I I distributIngvalves are tightly closed and then build up 1000 lbs. per
sq. i nch test pressure in the supply piping.
Hold this pressure on the piping for five
minutes, during which timegas maybe added,
as necessary, to maintain the pressure.
At the end of five minutes, shut off the
gas supply and observe pressure gauge.
The gauge should not show a pressure drop
greater than 150 lbs. per sq. inch per
minute over a two minute period. If the
pressure drop is faster, it is considered
that the leakage is too great and must be
reduced. (In making this test care must
be exercised to see that loss of pressure
is not due tofaulty test connections. )
TEST of PIPING between VALVES and PROTECTED SPACES
(600 lbs. per sq. in.)
1. Maintain same test connect ions as used for
test of piping between cylinder battery
and valves.
2. Open one distributing valve at a time and
blow line clear of foreign matter. (In
nozrle or bi tge piping systems fi rst remove
caps at ends of lines and then replace
caps after blowing clear.)
3. Cap the line within the protected space.
If the line ends in shielded nozrles or
perforated bilge piping, cap it at the
t i rst tee ahead of the distributing piping.
4. Build up test pressure of 600 lbs. per sq.
in. Hold this pressure on the piping for
five minutes, during which time gas may
be added, as necessary, to maintain the
pressure.
5. At the end oi five minutes, shut off the
gas supply and observe pressure gauge.
The gauge should not show a pressure drop
greater than 150 lbs. per sq. inch per
minute over a two minute period. If the
pressure drop is faster, it is considered
that the leakage is too great and must 01
reduced.
6. Repeat above tests for each distributing
I ine.
7. After testing has been completed, return
all piping to its normal operating condition. Reset time delay if one is fitted
to system.
IONTROLS WERE ON   I S 2 CYl
NOTE   T   REVISED
REVISED   TITLE
REVISION
RG.        T.K.      J. K.
kS
%L&
1-K-
KI0OE  CARB01 0;OX IDE
FIRE  EXTINGUISHING SYSTE'i
Waltar Kldto « C.nip.or, I
BILL!VILLI,   Nl»   JtHMT
PROCEDURE   FOR
PRESSURE TESTS  OF
INSTALLED    PIPING
FLOOD   VALVE   EQUIPMENT
6-7-45        L-82120  -c
 79475-LOCAL   CONTROL   LEVER
66763-WHEEL   ASSEMBLY
SET   SCREW
33497-CLOSURE     DISC
15262- SEAL WIRE
7010- LOCKING   PIN
-79476-COVER
33157-CABLE   NIPPLE   SUPPLIED
BY   W.K. a   CO.   FOR   TANDEM
INSTALLATION    ONLY.
CONTINUOUS   CABLE   TO 'J_
SECOND   CONTROL   HEAD
CABLE   PIPE
■BY INSTALLER
-CONTROL CABLE
-33087-CABLE  PIPE   LOCKNUT
1692-11 IS    COVER   SCREW
33089-SPRING
29604-PACKING
INSTALLATION     INSTRUCTIONS
SINGLE    CONTROL   HEAD 7
1. CAUTION-TO AVOID POSSIBILITY  OF ACCIDENTAL   DISCHARGE,
DO NOT  INSTALL DISCHARGE  HEAD ON CONTROL CYLINDER UN- 8.
TIL AFTER  CABLE-OPERATED  CONTROL HEAD IS INSTALLED.       g,
2. SECURE CONTROL CYLINDER IN CYLINDER RACKS WITH CONTROL
OUTLET FACING IN PROPER DIRECTION, THEN REMOVE CONTROL
OUTLET   PROTECTION   CAP. 10.
3. REMOVE COVER FROM CONTROL HEAD AND TAKE OUT WHEEL
ASSEMBLY,  CABLE PIPE  LOCKNUT, AND  CLOSURE DISC.'
4.MAKE SURE PLUNGER IS BELOW SURFACE OF CONTROL HEAD "•
BODY, THEN COUPLE BODY TO CYLINOER WITH ARROW POINT- 12.
ING   IN  OIRECTION  OF  PULL.
5. ASSEMBLE CABLE PIPE LOCKNUT TO CABLE PIPE AND PLACE
CABLE PIPE  IN  POSITION   IN CONTROL HEAD BODY. 13,
6. SLIDE WHEEL ASSEMBLY ON CONTROL CABLE TO PROPER "SET
POSITION^ THEN TIGHTEN SET SCREWS SECURELY. MAKE SURE
WHEEL ASSEMBLY IS AT START OF STROKE. DO NOT DEPRESS
LEVER  AS  THIS  WILL   CAUSE   DISCHARGE  OF GAS.
CUT OFF EXCESS CONTROL CA8LE CLOSE TO WHEEL ASSEMBLY,
INSERT CLOSURE DISC AND REPLACE COVER ON CONTROL HEAD.
EXAMINE SEAL AT LOCKING PIN, MAKE SURE IT IS INTACT.
INSTALL  DISCHARGE  HEAD  ON   CONTROL CYLINDER.
TANDEM   CONTROL   HEAPS
INSTALL FIRST CONTROL HEAD AS DESCRIBEO IN  STEPS I THRU
9 EXCEPT THAT IN STEP 7 CLOSURE DISC IS   OMITTEO   AND
CABLE IS NOT TO BE CUT UNTIL SECOND HEAD IS  INSTALLED.
REPEAT STEPS  2, 3, AND 4  FOR SECOND  CONTROL HEAD.
ASSEMBLE SECOND CABLE PIPE  LOCKNUT  TO CABLE   NIPPLE,
SLIDE NIPPLE OVER FREE END OF CONTROL CABLE AND PLACE
IN  PROPER  POSITION BETWEEN THE  CONTROL  HEADS.
REPEAT STEPS  6,7, 8,AND 9 FOR THE SECOND CONTROL HEAD.
PART NO. 794 69
ISSUED     ON
PKK.T fc<-»=>3    M'OlSi&MlO
REVISED   TITLE
SLIGHT   REVISION
RS V IS I OR
TAG
1.K-
Jfr+-
w.
I-Me IK
1.K-
OATC  CK'K'O
DOUBLE
KIDDE   CARBON   OIOXIDE"
FIRE   EXTINGUISHING    SYSTEM
Waltsr Kiss. « Csssyspri las.
BsnsrUSs, Nrw Jitwj
INSTALLATION    DETAIL
CONTROL    HEAD
CABLE-OPERATED
FLOOD   VALVE EQUIPMENT
6-II-45
L-82I34 -c
 r
|" SUPPLY  BY INSTALLER
.Nv    INSTALL  UNION  AT THIS
^ POINT FOR EASE   IN
MAINTENANCE
jLD.   MTG. HOLES  (2)
NOZZLE
BOOY
ROTOR
PERFORATED  HOOD
NAMEPLATE
DIRT TRAP     TO CONSIST
OF   3* LONG   NIPPLE  AND
BRASS  PIPE   CAP.
FRONT    VIEW
NOTES
t      SIREN  MAY BE INSTALLED   ON  BULKHEAD  OR UNOERSIOE OF DECK.
2.    BLOW   OUT  PIPING   CLEAR OF FOREIGN MATTER    BEFORE  MAKING
CONNECTION    TO  SIREN.
SIDE    VIEW
asvisiow
■r-igLsf.
1.K.
Mm*
MODE    CARBON   DIOXIDE
PTRl   EXTINS.UISHTN6   SYSTEM
■ ttLUBCUL. sjgg jjggf
INSTALLATION
PRESSURE  OPERATED
SIREN
I2-4-45       L-82343
 /"N
F~-
FERENCE
►   ..rIAWINGS
L-84729
N
ALLOW. SUITABLE CLEARANCE
FOR MANUAL OPERATION OF
CONTROL HEAD  LEVER.
LOCAL CONTROL  LEVER
(CLOSED POSITION)
* VENT -g'
CONTROL  HEAD SWIVEL  NUT
OUTLET
LOCKING   PIN
PIPE (BY   INSTALLER)
1. VALVE   MUST   BE   INSTALLED   WITH  ARROW POINTING
IN   DIRECTION  OF   FLOW.
2. VALVE   CAN  BE  INSTALLED  IN   HORIZONTAL  OR IN VERTICAL   PIPE   RUN.
3. CONTROL   HEAD CAN   BE  TURNED   AND   SECURED IN   POSITION   DESIRED
AT   SWIVEL NUT.
VALVE
SIZE
2
3."
3L
I-- 2"
ig    t-
51
3 2
tf
21
' 2
«*
93
3 8
•of
i3JL
13 8
2^
^8
•5
6 16
7-i
' 16
:vIs to N
BCRinjrca.
~-c™&.
BY      DATE   CKK'O
ISSUED ON
KIDDE  CARBON DIOXIDE
FIRE  EXTINGUISHING   SYSTEM
Waltsr KU«s 0 Csmpsnv, las.
BallsTllls, Nsw Jsrsar
TYPICAL    INSTALLATION
1/2"-2" PRESSURE   OPERATED
VALVE"LOCAL  CONTROL
10-22-51
L-84720
 ilewor -«a»ffln>
<amm -xsmi
ILmMMB WI1I-3S4B73
mm.   SEML -IS2BE
COTTER  PIN-1426-6205 (2)
TRIGGER PIN- 34707
STEM-202143
STEM  GUIDE-202144
BODY- 202142
RING-1096-0025
SPRING-34701
MOUNTING   WIRE- 23221
MOUNTING NUT- 34731
0' RING  PACKING- 1080-0300
WASHER-1245-1200
■ • VISION
\6~9. tX^~
PTNO, 8T0652
KIODE  CARBON DIOXIDE
FIRE   EXTINGUISHING  SYSTEM
INSTALLATION     DETAIL
CONTROL      HEAD
LEVER    OPERATED
VENTED TYPE
e-16-M
L-84729
 LOCKING  PIN-33473
SEAL WIRE-15262
M.
CHAIN-23301
'0'RING PACKING-I080-I000
MOUNTING  NUT-34731
SPRING-34701
MOUNTING  WIRE-23221
"O'RING PACKING-1080-0300
WASHER-204360
COTTER PIN- 1426-6205 (2)
TRIGGER   PIN-34707
PISTON   ROD-34704
MACHINE SCREW-I563-I708 (4)
SEAL-202129
O'RING   PACKING-I080-I0Q0
BODY-270473
O'RING   PACKING-1080-0300
I
WASHER-201848
SHIPPING CAP-1854-4100!
(REMOVE AT INSTALLATION)
PISTON-202128
NIVIIION
scP~sii '*r~?y. Jtt.lf'
BY      DATE   CH'K'D
PT. N0.870897
KIDDE  CARBON DIOXIDE
FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
Wsltsr Kalaa « Css»ia«y, Us.
BaUsTlUs, Msw Jsrssjr
INSTALLATION   DETAIL
CONTROL HEAD
LEVER OR PRESSURE OPERATED
VENTED  TYPE
7-7-52
L-85105
 CLEARANCE  REQUIREO
FOR   REMOVAL    OF
DISCHARGE    HEAD
FRONT   VIEW
REDUCING    TEE
PLUG
TAPER   PIPE   THREAD
FLEXIBLE   DISCHARGE   LOOP
DISCHARGE    HEAD
PLAIN   NUT   TYPE
TIGHTEN  SECURELY
TO CYLINDER VALVE
CYLINDER VALVE
IOOLB  CAPACITY
CYLINDER
SIDE    VIEW
15 § (FOR  I ^MANIFOLD)
10'       I5^"(F0R I^MANIFOLD)
I5;i (FOR  I"   MANIFOLD)
6
SsAnJcU, ^C
%.!>">#
jy
KIODC    CARBON   DIOXID'
FIRE    EXTINGUISHING    »T«'TEM
Walter KUU« v C«-r.<M«r, ■»••
If LLEVILLf, HEW  JtHStY
TYPICAL   INSTALLATION
PRESSURE- OPERATED
CYLINDERS
100 LB. CAP CYLINDERS
FLOOD VALVE EQUIPMENT
9-26-52   L-85205 -
 o
LOCAL CONTROL   LEVER-*
LOCKING  PIN
MANIFOLD
3"
DISCHARGE    HEAD
PLAIN   NUT   TYPE
TIGHTEN   SECURELY
TO CYLINDER  VALVE
CONTROL HEAD
SEE DWG L-82134
TAPER   PIPE   THREAD
CLEARANCE   REQUIRED   FOR
REMOVAL OF   OISCHARGE   HEAD
FLEXIBLE   DISCHARGE    LOOP
CONTROL CABLE
CORNER PULLEY
" PIPE   OR   CONDUIT
(BY   INSTALLER)
100 LB.   CAPACITY    CYLINDER
FRONT  VIEW
NOTE-.
CONTROL   HEADS   MAY  BE REVERSED   SO THAT   CABLE   PULLS TO THE LEFT.
SAFETY
OUTLET
END   VIEW
Ft I.   V I S   I   C,   h
.£**&«***> ■<Co>-i^
lr
KIDDE  CARBON DIOXTOE
FIRE   EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
Wattsr Klaas *> Csssaaay, las.
8ELLEVHLE,   NEW   JERSEY
TYPICAL   INSTALLATION
CABLE-OPERATED
CONTROL    CYLINDERS
100   LB. CAP. CYLINDERS
FLOOD VALVE  EQUIPMENT
9-26-52
L-85206-
 '"
TERENCE
4AWINGS
CONTROL  HEAD
(DWG.L-82134)
3/8   PIPE OR CONDUIT
(BY   INSTALLER)
CONTROL  CABLE-
CONTROL  HEAD SWIVEL  NUT-
NOTES-
A-«-
L-8 2134
LOCAL   CONTROL   LEVER
(CLOSED  POSITION)
LOCKING   PIN
8- HOLES   FOR 7/8" D. X 5"LG. BOLTS
EQUALLY   SPACED ON   8l/2"DIA.
BOLT CIRCLE.
INLET
PIPE(BY  INSTALLER)
10-^   DIAMETER   FLANGE
4
x4   ASA  RING JOINT   STANDARD
COMPANION  FLANGE-TAPPED
3 1/2" OR   4" IRS. THD.(AS REQ'D)
BOTH ENDS OF   VALVE.
VIEW    A-A
1. VALVE   MUST BE   INSTALLED  WITH   ARROW   POINTING   IN   DIRECTION OF   FLOW.
2. VALVE   CAN  BE   INSTALLED  IN   HORIZONTAL   OR   IN   VERTICAL PIPE  RUN.
3. COMPANION   FLANGES, BOLTS, NUTS AND GASKETS   SUPPLIED   BY   W.K. 8 CO.,INC.
4. CONTROL   HEAD   CAN   BE   TURNED AND  SECURED  IN  POSITION   DESIRED AT SWIVL
NU1
5. CONTROL  CABLE  TO BE  LED IN  3/8 ' GALV. PIPE OR CONDUIT.OR BRASS   PIPE,USING CORNER
PULLEYS  AT   ALL   CHANGES   IN  DIRECTION.  NO BENDS  OR  OFFSETS  PERMITTED.
ASSY ulMO'/uj
REVISION
&fk~
•"&y
»fe
V-
KIDDE  CARBON DIOXIDE
FIRE   EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
Walter KMds & Companr, Ins.
Belleville, New Jersey
TYPICAL   INSTALLATION
3V"4"FLANGED PRESSURE
OPERATED  VALVE
-REMOTE CONTROL-
10-4-51
L-85262-A
J
 LOCAL CONTROL   LEVER
(OPERATED  POSITION)
CONTROL  HEAD
84729
SWIVEL  NUT TO PERMIT
CONTROL TO BE TURNED
AND  SECURED IN
POSITION   DESIRED
LOCKING   PIN
AND SEAL WIRE
OUTLET/
(\
_2J
3/4" TAPER   PIPE THD.
BUSHED  1/2" AS REQ'D)
PRESSURE OPERATED
DISCHARGE   DELAY ASSY.
DWG. L- 85646
important:
assembly must be installed
with arrow pointing in
direction of flow
REFERENCE
DRAWINGS
L-84729
L-85646
ALLOW  SUITABLE CLEARANCE
FOR  MANUAL  OPERATION OF
LOCKING  PIN AND CONTROL
HEAD LEVER
—PREFERRED
v_y
INSTALL  UNIT IN  ANY  POSITION
BELOW  HORIZONTAL  AS   SHOWN
REV. TITLE-ADDED DETAIL
A-
tfa*
%
BY       DATE   CHK'O
V.
KIDOE   CARBON  DIOXIDE
FIRE  EXTINGUISHING     SYSTEM
Waltsr Kldde « Company, Ins.
Belleville, Nsw Jersey
TYPICAL     INSTALLATION
PRESSURE   OPERATED
DISCHARGE   DELAY
AND
LOCAL  CONTROL  HEAD
10-30-53
L-85643 -A
  ,'r
Ti"
f
4"
3"
"■
notes:
switch may be mounted in any position bufweferred installation
c02 gas supply line entering from the bottom.
4 J*
IS WITH
WHEN THE LINE LOAD IS GREATER THEN   SWITCH  RATING. THE SWITCH   SHOULD  BE
USED TO BREAK THE  RELAY  HOLDING COIL CIRCUIT ONLY.    (RELAY BY OTHERS)
F
OPERATED
h- SET
51
<>
-(4) £ MOUNTING
HOLES
(toni
4
®
a"
j4
M
m
c3&
aHN
I. a
&
®
-o-
-4"-
rf-J
2 COVER
SCREWS-
FRONT    VIEW
COVER REMOVED
FINISH - CRACKLE  RED
i ■   '   i i
PISTON MAY BE
USED FOR  MANUAL
OPERATION  OF SWITCH
Kidde
PRESSURE OPERATED SWITCH
3R DT
TO   RESET
PUSH STEM TO SET POSITION
-®
IHPI-2-3PH  I2S-4L-
PT. NO.   873752
<@>
Wolter Kidde 8 Compony Inc
Belleville, New Jersey
ISAMP-ttSVAC.^JOAMp 250VAC
"  180 VAX.
L L,
I
-J I.
LT ,.
L,—J
-NIPPLE
-INSTALL  UNION
AS SHOWN
u—cri
FRONT    VIEW
-C02 SUPPLY
OPERATED
POSITION
OF PISTON
, CONDUIT
KNOCKOUTS
EACH SIDE
£ PIPE THD.
SECTION
RAT1NQ 125-480 WAS 118-575
REVISION
DRAWN
PM.M.
*
jfh Q-iea
■V      DATE   CH'ICB
FULL  SIZE
IMUED ON
Walter Kldd« «r Conpaar, bw.
■tonni*, k*w jNtqr
PRESSURE-OPERATED
SWITCH
3 POLE      DOUBLE  THROW
' TOGGLE   TYPE
DAT!
8-3-62
L-6I54I0   -A
 57
8
58
59
10
60
61
12
62
13
63
14
64
15
65
16
66
67
18
68
69
20
70
22
72
23
73
24
74
25
75
26
cgar
76
27
77
28
78
29
79
30
80
34
84
35
85
36
86
37
87
39
89
40
90
91
42
92
43
93
44
94
45
95
46
96
47
97
48
98
49
99
50
100
SO 3807
3
; , 0    J    / , I.Oo
®
SYM
REVISION    DESCRIPTION
/ V J/j?S/-/.j /-fV<r:/-'/<^ >^/.A-:r/<?\
&
ff>< 3.oo(/3£, i,0b a f. }q* Pr/nfiDgQ
DATE
J*?-*!
/d'-T6?
BY
^H>
CHK.
^
ENG
APP.
212532
C0V£/Z      2447JT4-
-244/V3 &Opy
e/2f3t £>iui£r
SIMILAR  PARTS
NEXT ASSY.
NOTICE: This drawing hoi been conditionally itiutd by Walter Kidde & Company, Inc. Tha information and data thereon may not be uitd nor tho drawing ba reproduced in whole or in part without the written per*
mission of Kidde, whether or not such drawing is known technically as a reproducible drawing.   All reproductions in whole or in part permitted to be made, including vendors shop drawings, shall beor this notice.
UNLESS   OTHERWISE   SPECIFIED.
DIMENSIONS   ARE IN   INCHES AND TOLERANCES ON:
2   PLACE   DECIMALS  ±  .02 ANCLES ±   |'
J   PLACE   DECIMALS  ±  .005
CONCENTRICITY: T. I. It.
IN/IN.
SQUARENESS:
PARALLELISM :
IN/IN.
MATERIAL
STOCK
LENGTH
STO.  PT. NO.
CODE  NO.
HEAT TREAT
APPLIED
FINISH
Brw&JPfcOFF fltffal
CHECKED J j j
OSCN. SUPVR.
/    /
/    /
CHEM. MET.
/    /
ENGINEER
/    /
ALL  SURFACES TO BE
UNLESS OTHERWISE  NOTED
s/
EMCiOSZD Pl/LlEf
'//6 -fa fgfj C<4&1£
SCALE
'A.
WT.
TO
cJ>^:>
Wetter KMMc Ct CMtaeay, lac.
■ -M tJ*^     W- a»     |, , ,._
DWG. NO. a PART NO.
&038O7
SHEET        /        OF        /        SHEETS
 :;'. ■:.''-■:
M§
t
i
■■:
iildde
INSTRUCTIONS
FOR THE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
OF THE
'KIDDE" LOCAL MANUAL & REMOTE MANUAL
FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
Walter Kidde & Company, Inc.
Belleville, New Jersey
F-40772
 INSTRUCTIONS
FOR THE
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
OF
KIDDE LOCAL MANUAL & REMOTE MANUAL FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
When communicating with Walter Kidde & Company, Inc., regarding any part of this system,
please refer to our Contract Number.
INDEX
TITLE
CARBON DIOXIDE AS AN EXTINGUISHING AGENT
DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
PRIMARY EQUIPMENT
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
OPERATION
AFTER FIRE HAS BEEN EXTINGUISHED
MAINTENANCE
WEIGHING SCALE
RECORD OF CYLINDER WEIGHTS
AND RECHARGING STATIONS
PAGE
1
2
2
2-3
3-4
4-5
5-8
9
WALTER KIDDE & COMPANY, INC.
BELLEVILLE, NEW JERSEY
 YOU CAN BE PROUD OF YOUR KIDDE EQUIPMENT.   IT AFFORDS YOU THE BEST
POSSIBLE PROTECTION FROM FIRE.   THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS WILL
ENABLE YOU TO BECOME FULLY FAMILIAR WITH THIS EQUIPMENT AND TO
MAINTAIN IT IN PERFECT CONDITION AT ALL TIMES.
IF YOU PREFER YOU CAN HAVE EXPERT KIDDE MAINTENANCE WITH COMPETENT,
EXPERIENCED, FACTORY TRAINED MEN TO HANDLE YOUR SERVICING. ASK YOUR
KIDDE REPRESENTATIVE ABOUT OUR ANNUAL SERVICE AGREEMENT.
THIS KIDDE PRODUCT IS TAILOR-MADE TO MEET YOUR PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
AND TO PERFORM AS YOU WANT IT TO PERFORM.   IT INCORPORATES THE APPLICATION KNOWLEDGE AND SKILLS THAT WE HAVE ACQUIRED IN MORE THAN THIRTY
YEARS OF INTENSIVE CONCENTRATION IN THIS FIELD.   IT IS HIGH QUALITY
EQUIPMENT BUILT TO LAST LONGER AND BE OPERABLE FOR MANY YEARS AFTER
INSTALLATION.
TREAT YOUR EQUIPMENT WELL AND IT WILL SERVE YOU FAITHFULLY.
PLEASE NOTE
WHILE THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS INTENDED TO COVER ALL FACETS
PERTAINING TO THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF YOUR CARBON DIOXIDE
FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM, IT MAY BE THAT OVER THE YEARS CHANGES IN PHYSICAL SIZE OR PROCESS HAVE OUT-GROWN THE ORIGINAL "KIDDE" PROTECTION.
YOUR SYSTEM MAY REQUIRE REVIEW AND REVISION OF COVERAGE.   IF SO. DO NOT
HESITATE TO CONTACT YOUR NEAREST W. KIDDE & CO. INC., REPRESENTATIVE.
Walter Kidde & Company, Inc.
 CARBON DIOXIDE AS AN EXTINGUISHING AGENT
The "Kidde" Fire Extinguishing System uses carbon dioxide gas as the extinguishing agent.
Carbon dioxide is a standard commercial product, being most commonly used for carbonating
beverages, and is available in most of the large cities and seaports throughout the world.
Carbon dioxide is normally colorless except that, when discharging, it resembles a cloud of
steam.  When inhaled in small amounts, it produces a tingle in the nostrils the same as experienced when drinking soda water.   It is a non-conductor of electricity, is non-corrosive, and non-
injurious to all substances, and although heavier than air, it does not contain oxygen in any form
available for supporting combustion or for sustaining human life in breathing.
"Fast" fires such as engine room, oil, or paint fires, are quickly extinguished by flooding
the area with carbon dioxide gas.   This reduces the oxygen content and creates an inert atmosphere which smothers the fire.   "Slow" or "Deep-seated" fires, such as fires in paper, clothing
or similar substances, are extinguished by prolonged action of a high concentration of carbon
dioxide.   In addition to its smothering action, carbon dioxide is aided in extinguishing fire by
its cooling effect.
Since a person will have difficulty in breathing and may suffocate in an atmosphere of carbon
dioxide, caution must be taken before entering any space filled with this odorless gas. Thoroughly
ventilate the space into which the gas has been discharged to make certain that all portions
contain only fresh air.
If it be necessary for a person to enter a space before it is thoroughly ventilated, he may do
so by using a fresh air mask or other type of self-contained breathing apparatus.   DO NOT USE
a filter type of mask or a canister gas mask.   No one should enter such a space without another
person as observer and standby outside the space.
Should a person be overcome by carbon dioxide, it is essential that he be immediately
rescued from the space containing the gas.   Call a physician.   To revive a person so overcome,
give him plenty of fresh air and apply artificial respiration (as in the case of drowning) using
oxygen, but do not use carbon dioxide as a stimulant.
An ammonia inhalant may be used and the person should be kept warm (by the application
of friction and heat to the extremities).
The carbon dioxide is stored in liquid form in steel cylinders carefully tested for strength
under governmental supervision.   The pressure within the cylinder depends on the temperature,
being 504 pounds per square inch at 32 degrees F. and 850 pounds per square inch at 70 degrees
F., although the carbon dioxide content is never determined by using a pressure gauge.   The gas
content may be determined only by the weighing of the cylinder.
Each cylinder is provided with a safety relief disc which will release the gas before the
pressure exceeds the cylinder test pressure.   Cylinders should be stored in a cool place whenever possible.   The maximum safe storage temperature for all cylinders is 130 degrees F.
Specially charged cylinders can be supplied for higher storage temperatures.
 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT (Cont'd.)
ALARM GONG
An electric alarm gong, controlled by the pressure switch described on Page 2, may be
installed when it is desired to sound an alarm in the protected space, or at a remote location.
PRESSURE-OPERATED SIREN
When no electrical power is available, a pressure-operated siren makes it possible to sound
an alarm within the protected space.   Since it is connected to the carbon dioxide distribution
piping system, the siren should be installed in the space protected.
REMOTE CONTROL
If it is necessary to locate the cylinders within the protected space, or if additional controls
are desired, a manual control pull-box can be installed at any remote location, limited only by a
reasonable length of control cable.   The remote control is connected to the cable operated control head, by flexible cable run in 3/8" conduit or pipe, using corner pulleys at all changes in
direction.   No bends or offsets are permitted.
DUAL PULL MECHANISM
Should two remote controls be desired, they are connected through a dual pull junction box
so that only one cable leads to the automatic control head. This mechanism makes it possible
to operate the system from either pull box.
DIRECTIONAL VALVES
Multiple hazards may be protected from a common supply of carbon dioxide, using directional
valves, with either local manual control heads or cable-operated control heads to direct carbon
dioxide to the hazard afire.   When the local manual control head is used, both the directional
valve and the cylinder control heads must be operated to discharge carbon dioxide gas.   When the
cable-operated control head is used, operation of the pull-box will operate both the Directional
Valve and the Cylinder Control Heads through the series of cable, corner pulleys and Dual Pull
Mechanism.
WEIGHING SCALE
A weighing scale can be provided to weigh cylinders without removing them from the cylinder
frame.   See page 9 for proper weighing instructions.
SHUT-OFF VALVES
Shut-off valves can be installed to shut off fuel, gas, oil, paint, etc.   The valve is normally
held open by a pressure-operated trip - discharge of the carbon dioxide operates the trip, and
the valve's weighted lever drops, shutting off the supply to hazard afire.
OPERATION
This Kidde Fire Extinguishing System is entirely manual in operation; therefore, it is imperative that there be as little delay as possible in carrying out the following instructions, as
the effectiveness of the carbon dioxide is materially increased by smothering the fire in its early
stages.
SYSTEMS WITH LEVER OPERATED CONTROL HEADS
Go to cylinder location marked Main and/or for "Hazard" afire, pull pin, and operate lever
on control head(s).
SYSTEMS WITH DIRECTIONAL VALVES AND LEVER OPERATED CONTROL HEADS
Go to proper directional valve marked for "Hazard" afire, pull pin, and operate lever on
control head.
 AFTER FIRE HAS BEEN EXTINGUISHED (Cont'd.)
Remove control head(s) from cylinder(s), and remove control head cover(s).
Retract roller of remote control head as far as possible from direction of pull.   (Roller
should be at start of stroke).
Make certain plunger is retracted into control head body.   Replace cover, locking pin
and insert new seal wire.   Reinstall control head(s) to cylinder valve(s), tighten mounting nut
securely with an 18" wrench.
5. Inspect the orifices of all nozzles to make certain that they are not obstructed.   DO NOT
REMOVE any nozzle tip from its shield.   Replace any frangible disc(s), placing gasket on gas
.side of disc.   (Use only ONE disc per nozzle).
6. Remove the cap(s) from any dirt trap(s) or remove LAST nozzle(s) located at end(s) of
distributing piping and inspect for foreign matter.   Replace cap(s) or nozzle(s) wrench tight.
7. Reset distributing valve(s) if any to its normal position.
8. Reset discharge indicator in cylinder manifold by pushing indicator rod BACK into body.
(Use small rod or pencil - no special tool is required).   NOTE:   Not all manifolds have a
discharge indicator — it depends on system design).
9. Reinstall the recharged cylinder(s).   (See instructions for reinstallation of cylinder(s)
included in this book).
MAINTENANCE
The Kidde system as installed requires no more than ordinary care to insure its proper
operation at all times.   Frequent inspections should be made, however, as experience has shown
that emergency equipment of this kind is often unintentionally neglected or tampered with.
ONCE EVERY MONTH
Make a general inspection of the entire system to make certain that nothing has occurred
to interfere with the operation of the equipment or with access to the release controls.   Inspect
all piping and equipment for mechanical breakage.   Replace any damaged equipment immediately.
IMPORTANT
Examine all nozzles and piping (dismantle if necessary) for obstructions from paint, oil,
grease, etc., which may have drained into the system due to slop, fumes or overflow from hazard
protected.   Where rupture discs are used, make sure they are intact and clean.   Look for holes or
cuts.   The extinguishment of the fire may well depend on freedom from such obstruction? or
defects.
ONCE EVERY SIX MONTHS
Make an inspection of the manual release equipment.
ONCE EVERY YEAR
It is recommended that the system be inspected by an experienced Service Engineer of
Walter Kidde & Company, Inc.
WEIGHING (Without Kidde Weighing Scale)
The Kidde cylinders should be removed and weighed to determine the carbon dioxide Lonictii.
(DO NOT attempt to determine content by using a pressure gauge).   See instructions for removal
included in this book before proceeding.   Subtract from total weight the tare (empty) weight that
is stamped on the cylinder valve body.   (This tare weight does not include the weight of discharge
 MAINTENANCE (Cont'd.)
INSTRUCTIONS FOR REMOVAL OF CYLINDERS
These instructions are to be carefully observed in the order given below when any cylinder
or group of cylinders is to be removed at any time.
CAUTION:   When removing charged cylinders, always disconnect the discharge heads firsL   This
will eliminate the possibility of discharging the carbon dioxide, with possible injury
to personnel.
1. Remove discharge heads from all cylinder valves by loosening mounting nuts (right-hand
threads).   On two-or more cylinder installations, swing discharge head and loop away from cylinder
and allow to hang.
2. Remove all control heads from the cylinder valves.   To do this, loosen mounting nut
(rightrhand thread).
3. Screw large top protection cap on threads on top of cylinder valve.   Cap control head
outlet by screwing on side protection cap.
4. Remove cylinder racks.
5. Remove cylinder(s).   It is recommended that the cylinder cap be screwed on, to prevent
damage to cylinder valve during removal.   (This cap is not included in the empty weight of the
cylinder).
RECHARGING INFORMATION
Kidde cylinders should be recharged
with "bone-dry" carbon dioxide.   This can be
be done at any recharging station listed in
this instruction book, or see "Kidde
System" or "Walter Kidde Sales Agency"
in your telephone directory.
top snotietiosi
CSS	
-cfiaMfn ear
Recharge adapter Part No. 933537 is
required in the recharging of an empty or
partially filled cylinder.   Replacement safety
discs will be found with the spare parts.
For additional safety discs order part No.
902048 for cylinders marked ICC-3A-1800 or
ICC-3A-2015 and part No. 903684 for cylinders
marked ICC-3A-2300.
MM* tatotr Mas « Waafta*
♦aWUCIHWIT  MCU4I  «•   WMI
LSX"
I-RECHARGE   ADAPTER
2-ENVELOPE   CONTAINING SAFETY
DISC
INSTRUCTIONS FOR REINSTALLATION OF CYLINDERS
These instructions are to be carefully observed in the order given below when any cylinder
or group of cylinders is to be reinstalled at any time.
CAUTION:   When reinstalling charged cylinders, always replace the discharge hcuo LAST.
This will eliminate the possibility of discharging the carbon dioxide, with possible
injury to personnel.
1.   Place fully recharged cylinder in cylinder rack before removing the cylinder cap.   (See
sketch above for identification of parts).
 INSTRUCTION FOR WEIGHING PRESSURE OPERATED CYLINDERS
21"- NOT INCLUDING
CLEARANCE FOR OPERATOR
WEIGHING ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT SLEEVE
LEVER
DISCHARGE HEAD
YOKE
CONTROL HEAD
COUPLING NUT
INITIAL POSITION
FINAL POSITION
8-'/4" DIA. WEIGHING
SCALE-ROTATED 90° FOR
CLEARNESS
POINTER INITIAL
POSITION
FINGER GRIP RING
1 - Remove control head(s) at the coupling nut(s) only.
When Tandem Heads are used - back off each head 1/2" before attempting to completely
remove either head.
2 — Loosen clamps so cylinders are free.
3 - Hook scale on weighing angle and slip yoke under discharge head.   Adjust lever to
position shown.
4 - Pull down until cylinder is just clear of floor and lever is horizontal.
5 - Read weight directly off scale (scale is calibrated to take care of leverage).   Deduct
from reading the empty cylinder weight which is stamped on valve body.   Also deduct
3-3/4 lbs. for weight of discharge head.   The result is the amount of liquid carbon
dioxide in the cylinder.
6 - When all cylinders have been weighed, tighten clamps and reinstall control head(s).
Pull up coupling nut(s) on control head(s) snugly.
1210-B
 WALTER KIDDE & COMPANY INC. - DIRECTORY
MAIN OFFICE
Kidde
Walter Kidde & Company, Inc.
675 Main Street
Belleville, New Jersey 07109
(201) 759-5000
REGIONAL AND DISTRICT OFFICES
IC
Kidde
3605 Northeast Freeway Access Road
Atlanta, Georgia 30040
(404) 451-6122
150-154 Alco Place
Lansdowne Industrial Park
Baltimore County, Maryland 21227
(301) 247-4545
P.O. Box 1201
Allwood Station
Clifton, New Jersey 07012
(201) 777-0777
3301 John W. Carpenter Freeway
Irving, Texas 75062
(214) 259-3756
5332 South Dansher Road
LaGrange, Illinois 60525
(312) 352-1910
P.O. Box 1647
Long Beach, California 90801
(213) 595-5488-9
3930A N. W. 27th Street
Miami, Florida 33142
(305) 635-5027
10726 Trenton Avenue
St. Louis, Missouri 63132
(314) 426-2525
Civic Arcade
1212 Market Street, Suite A
San Francisco, California 94102
(415) 863-6858
3259 20th Avenue, West
Seattle, Washington 98109
(206) 283-1616
19400 W. Ten Mile Road, Suite 211
Southfield, Michigan 48075
(313) 358-1640
CANADIAN OFFICES
Walter Kidde & Company of Canada, Ltd.
154 Oneida Drive
Pointe Claire, 730, Quebec, Canada
(514) 636-0446
127 Cartwright Avenue
Toronto 19, Ontario
(416) 787-1471
P.O. Box 190
North Vancouver, B.C.
(604) 926-2119
INTERNATIONAL OPERATIONS
ENGLAND
Walter Kidde & Company Ltd.
Belvue Road
Northolt, Greenford, Middlesex
Telephone: 01-845-6611
GERMANY
Total Foerstner & Co.
Industriestrasse
P. O. Box 7
D-6802 Ladenburg/Neckar, Germany
Telephone: (06203) 2901
GERMANY
Walter Kidde GmbH
314 Luneburg
Luner/Rennbachn 2
West Germany
Telephone: (041-31) 188014/15
SWEDEN
Svenska Skumslacknings Aktiebolaget
Box 32
Byggmastaregatan 1
S-442 00 Kungalv, Sweden
Telephone: 030/11435
 a-   a ,    t
RECORD OF CYLINDER WEIGHTS
i ^Nlinder
^IAL NO.
TARE
WEIGHT
GROSS
WEIGHT
DATE
INSPECTOR
CYLINDER
SERIAL NO.
TARE
WEIGHT
GROSS
WEIGHT
DATE
INSPECTOR
o
\mS
o
Walter Kidde & Company, Inc.
Belleville, New Jersey
  ,  I
INSTRUCTION  MANUALS
FOR
BURRARD  DRY  DOCK  CO.   LTD.
FOR
INCAN RAIL CAR FERRY HULL 212
MAIN SWITCHBOARD
BG  CHECO  LTD.   REF:     M6564-D
IRRARD DRY  DOCK  CO.   LTD.   REF:      P.O.   212-900-140
 INDEX
1) List of DRawings
2) List of Equipment Manxials
3) Drawings
4) Equipment Manuals
 LIST OF DRAWINGS
MAIN SWITCHBOARD
DWG NO.
1) Material List
2) Nameplates List
3) Elementary Wiring Diagram
4) General Arrangement
5) Wiring DiaGram Cell 1-2-3-4-5
6) Spare Parts List
M6564-D Page 1 to 10 Iricl,
M6564-D 30A to 43A Incl.
M6564-D033-2E-3E
M6564-D034-1E
M6564-D0 3 0-4D-5D-6D-7D-8D
M6564-D Page 1
o
 &
EQUIPMENT MANUALS
MANUFACTURER
DESCRIPTION
CAT NO
Wesco
We sco
Wesco
Wesco
Wesco
Brown Boveri
Crompton
Esna
Sherly Controls
BASLER ELECTRIC
BASLER ELECTRIC
Circuit Breaker Type SCB
AB DE-ion Circuit Breaker
Automatic Synchronizer
Current Transformer Type KT1
Potential Transformer PT. 6A
Power and Directional Relay
Type CH90
Instruments
Agastat Series 2412-2422
Control Relays Type UC05
Manual Voltage Control
Module. Models MVC-104,
108 g 232
Voltage Regulator
Models SR4 £ SR8.
H-29-600
H-29-050
I.L.H41-1005
H-55-000
Page 3-4-5-6
H-55-000
Page 17-18
AB-334a
MNW1/1
SR-15-X
Cat Page 7-8-9
90 37000 99X
17700  99Y
 I
CUSTOMER:
BURRARD DRY DOCK
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
SITE:
ASCRIPTION
MAIN SWITCHBOARD    HULL 212
SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
JOB NO. M6564-D
ITEM
PAGE    1     OF
DATE March 28/74
MATERIAL    LIST
ITEM
NO.
O
QTY.
PREPARED
S   107
DESCRIPTION
Circuit Breaker Type SCB-600, Westinghouse
250 Amperes current monitor 600 Volt AC,
3 poles, fixed mounting with static sensor
style No.632 Having: Long time delay,
short time delay and instantaneous trip,
c/w motor operator for 120V, 60HZ,2 contacts
(!A-lB)(SPDT)and u/V release for 120V, 60HZ
Bus bar connection top & bottom
Automatic synchronizer TYPE XK
To be used on 120 Volt 60HZ.Internal
schematic No. 307A858 In Ft. 21 Case
Relay style No. 680D865A01
Crompton Parkinson A.C. voltmeter, 60HZ,
0-750 volt scale, 150 volt coil,
NWCKA pattern (red line at 600 volts)
For use with 600/120 volt P.T.
Crompton Parkinson AC ammeter, 60 HZ,
0-250 amp. scale, 5 amp. coil,
NWCKA pattern (red line at 180 amp.)
For use with 250/5 amp. CT.
Fluorescent fixture 18" single strip 120V,
60 HZ, HP factor c/w 15 watts tube cold whi
te
Crompton Parkinson AC wattmeters, 60 HZ,
25-0-225 KW scale, double element,
for use with 2 PT's 600/120 volt and
2 CT's 250/5 amp. NWCDW pattern, 3 phase
3 wire, unbalanced load (red line at
150 KW)
SUPPLIER
ORDER
NO.
DATE
ORDCR
WESCO
28711
CROMPTON
PARKINSON
28708
STOCK
CROMPTON
PARKINSON
28708
REVISIONS
REMARKS
52-1
52-2
52-3
25
V-l
V-2
V-3
A-l
A-2
A-3
N-l  N-2
N-3 N-4
N-5
KW-1
KW-2
KW-3
 CUSTOMER:
BURRARD DRY DOCK
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
SITE:
Q
CRIPTION
HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
JOB NOM6564-D
ITEM
PAGE    2     OF
date March 28/74
ITEM
NO.
10
11
11A
QTY.
MATERIAL    LIST
DESCRIPTION
Crompton Parkinson frequency meter,
56-64 cycle scale, 125 volt coil,
NWFCA pattern (red line at 60 cycle)
P.T. rated (600/120V)
Crompton Parkinson synchroscope, 60 HZ
120 volt potential coils.NWRS pattern,
P.T. rated (600/220V)
Santon rotary voltmeter switch
Cat. No: SRP-139V. Contact arrangement as
per dwg: no: St-2A
Escutcheon plate to be engraved as per
dwg. No: St-3A
Santon Rotary Voltmeter switch cat. no.
SRP 1211EG6/S contact arrangement as per
DWG No: St-4A escutcheon plate to be engraved as per DWG No: ST-5A
Santon Rotary ammeter switch Cat. No:
SRP 138 ME 52, Contact arrangement as per
dwg. No: St-78A
Escutcheon plate to be engraved as
per.dwg. No: ST-79A
Santon Rotary ammeter switch to be SRPi2|o/f
(Flush Mounting) contact arrangement as
per DWG M6564-D-50A. Escutcheon as per
DWG M6564-D-51A
SUPPLIER
CROMPTON
PARKINSON
££
ORDER
NO.
28708
DATE
ORDER
REMARKS
F-l
F-2
F-3
SYNC-1
VS-1
VS-2
VS-3
AS-1
AS-2
AS-3
PREPARED
S   107
REVISIONS
 CUSTOMER
BURRARD DRY DOCK
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
JOB NO. M6564-D
ITEM
SITE:                                                                                                        	
^SsroiPTiON        HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
PAGE   3     OF
DATE March 28/74
**
MATERIAL    LIST
ITEM
NO.
QTY.
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLIER
ORDER
NO.
DATE
ORDER
REMARKS
12
3
Struthers -Dunn relay type 112 x Bx, DPDT,
9.1 Volt complete with G6 Molded glass cover
91mA.
PLAYFORD
28709
50-1
50-2
50-3
13
3
Reverse power relays,  type CH90 3 phase
application using line to line voltage,
pick up range 5 to 25%, current coil
5 amp. voltage coil  115 volt 60 cycle,
consumption 4 VA, with built-in timer type
PA 115 volt 60HZ    tt&S sec.
Case size No.  1
BROWN
BOVERI
28710
32-1
32-2
32-3
44
3
Santon rotary governor switch with
ball  type handle
Cat.  No:  SRP-1311MT33/TA/RM1
Contact arrangement as per dwg. No: St-41A
Escutcheon plate to be engraved as per
dwg.  No: ST-42A
CROMPTON
PARKINSON
23708
636S-1
65CS-2
656S-3
15
3
Santon rotary breaker switch, spring
return Cat. No: SRP129AE89/RM1
Contact arrangement as per dwg. No: ST-43A
Escutcheon plate to be engraved as per
dwg.  No:  ST-44A
H
ii
52CS-1
52CS-2
52CS-3
16
1
Santon rotary synchronizing switch,
Cat.  No:  SRP  151?/?/ j3R
Contact arrangement as per dwg No: ST-54A
Escutcheon plate to be engraved as per
DW6.  No:  ST-62A
ii
M
25CS
17
D
2
Agastat time delay relay dial head,
delay on pull-in (ON) double pole
double throw double break, 115 volt AC
60 cycle coil time range .8 sec to 15 sec.
Cat. No:  2412 AC
WESCO
28711
62-A
62-B
PREPARED
REVISIONS
S   10
7
 CUSTOMER
BURRARD DRY DOCK
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
SITE:
Q
SCRIPTION
HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
JOB NO. M6564-D
ITEM
PAGE      4   Of
DATE   March 28/74
ITEM
NO.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
QTY.
MATERIAL    LIST
DESCRIPTION
Same as above except time range 2.5 sec.
50 sec.
Cat. No: 2412 AD
to
Santon Rotary ground lights switch,
Cat. No: SRP 1312A B66, contact arrangement
as per dwg: ST-37A, escutcheon plate
engraved as per dwg: ST-40A
Santon rotary lighting switch,
Cat. No: SRP 129Y43, contact arrangement
as per dwg: ST-36A, escutcheon plate
engraved as per dwg: ST-38A
Current transformer, Westinghouse
type KT.6A, 600 volt class, 60 HZ,
250/5 amp., 2 wiee. Cat. No: 816C960A13
Current transformer, Westinghouse
type KT1, 600 volt class, 60HZ,
250/5 amp., 2 wire. Cat. No: 722C548L04
Potential transformer, Westinghouse
type PT.6A, 600 volt class, 60HZ,
600/120 volt. Cat. No: 578C251L06
Control transformer, hammond type "E",
60 HZ, 600/120 volt, 100 VA
Cat. No: E69J
SUPPLIER
WESCO
CROMPTON
PARKINSON
WESCO
ORDER
NO.
28711
28708
28711
DATE
ORDER
3US
:pt-
;pt-
32
15
REMARKS
62-C
6ND    SW
S-l
S-3
S-2
S-4
6EN.
CT-1 (3)
CT-2 (3)
CT-3 (3)
SHORE
CT-14
-6EN
PT-1    (2)
PT-2   (2)
PT-3   (2)
6EN.
cpt-11
CPT-12
CPT-13
SHORE
CPT-14
PREPARED
S   107
REVISIONS
 CUSTOMER:
BURRARD DRY DOCK
FOR  INCAN MARINE LTD.
SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
JOB NOM6564-D
ITEM
SITE:
Q^biption      HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
PAGE    5     OF
DATE March 28/74
MATERIAL    LIST
ITEM
NO.
QTY.
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLIER
ORDER
NO.
DATE
ORDER
REMARKS
24A
3
Same as above except 750 VA
Cat.  No:  EM9J
WESCO
28711
6EN.
CPT-1
CPT-2
CPT-3
25
2
Incandescent lamp, 125 volt,  10 watt
medium screw base, clear bulb, shppe
S-14
STOCK
SYNCH
LAMPS
25A
2
Porcelain receptacle 660 watts 250 V
medium screw base hubbel Cat.  50 715
n
n
26
4
Indicating light, dialco Cat. No:
31-3101-0435-301, for S6 Candelabra screw
Base bulb, 1" hole mounting, friction cap
with faceted unfrosted lens colour white,
with screw terminals protruding.
ii
3-GEN
HEATER
3-GEN BKR
1-SHORE BKF
27
7
Similar to above item 26, except amber cap,
dialco cat.  No:  31-3101-0433-301
N
(3)
POWER AVAIL
3GEN-1  SHORE
28
6
Similar to Bbove item 26, except clear cap,
dialco cat.  no:  31-3101-0437-301
•'
GND-DET
29
17
Incandescent bulb, type S6,  135 volt, 6 watt
candelabra screw base.   (Item 26,27,23)
M
30A
0
1
Moulded case breaker, type "KA", 3 pole,
225 amp.  frame, 175 amp.  thermal magnetic
trip, Cat.  No:  KA3175V
WESCO
28711
120 V
ACCOM.
P.D.P.
BOAT DECK
PASSAGE
PREPA
RED
REVISIONS
S   10
7
              	
 : :
CUSTOMER
BURRARD DRY DOCK
SITE
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
CRIPTION
HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
ITEM
NO.
30B
31
32
34
35A
35B
SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
JOB NO
Mfi5fi4-n
ITEM
PAGE   6     OF
DATE   March 28/74
MATERIAL    LIST
35C
QTY.
DESCRIPTION
Moulded case breaker, type KA 3 poles, 225
amp. frame, 225A thermal magnetic trip
Cat. No: KA 3225V
Molded case breaker, type "FB", 3 pole
150 amp. frame,j ooamP• thermal magnetic
trip. Cat. No: FB31-QV, complete with shunt
trip coil rated 120 V. 60 HZ and INO/INC
auxiliary switch
Molded case breaker, type "FB" 3 pole,
150 amp. frame, 100 amp. thermal magnetic
trip, Cat. No: FB 3100V, complete with 120V,
undervoltage trip coil and 2N0/2NC
auxiliary switch
Molded case breaker, type "FB" 3 pole,
150 amp. frame, 150 amp. thermal magnetic
trip. Cat. No: FB3150V
Molded case breaker, type "FB" 3 pole,
150 amp. frame, 90 amp. thermal magnetic
trip. Cat. No: FB3090V
Molded case breaker, type "FB" 3 pole
150 Amp. frame, 40 amp. thermal magnetic
trip, Cat. No: FB 3040V
Molded case breaker, type "FB" 3 pole,
150 Amp. frame 20 Amp. thermal magnetic
trip Cat. No: FB 3020V
6)HZZ
SUPPLIER
WESCO
ORDER
NO.
28711
DATE
ORDER
REMARKS
MCC.  2
MCC II
SHORE
POWER PANEL
P-53-18
BOAT DECK
120V
TRANSFORMER:
P516
P517
P513    P514
SPARE
PREPARED
S   107
revisions*\    ITEM 31 16 &EAD looflT INSTEAD oP 6<DAT
 CUSTODIER:
BURRARD DRY DOCK
SITE
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
SCRIPTION:
HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
JOB NO. M6564-D
ITEM
PAGE   7     OF
DATE   March 28/74
ITEM
NO.
35D
36
37
38
38A
39
40
b
QTY.
MATERIAL    LIST
DESCRIPTION
Molded case breaker, type "FB" 3 pole,
150 Amp. frame 15 Amp. thermal magnetic
trip. Cat. No: FB3015V
Molded case breaker, type "MCP" 3 pole, ,
150 amp. frame, with 275-1000 amp. magnetic
trip only, 100 amp. continuous rating, Cat.
No: MCP 331000 c/w with 1A/1R aux. switch.
ADJUSTED      A 7 :   35 0 A)
Molded case breaker, type "EB" 3 pole,
100 amp. frame, 70 amp. thermal magnetic
trip. Cat. No: EB3070V
Molded case breaker, type "EB" 3 pole, 100
amp. frame, 60 amp. thermal magnetic trip
Cat. No: EB3060V
Molded case breaker, type "EB" 3 pole, 100
amp. frame, 30 amp. thermal magnetic trip
Cat. No: EB3030V
Ohmite dividohm resistor type 210,
3 OHMS, 175 watt cat. no: 1156C
complete with mounting braakets
Ohmite dividohm resistor, type 210,
50 OHM, 50 watt, mounting brackets
Cat. No: 0563
Ohmite dividohm resistor type 210,
150 OHM, 50 watt Cat. No: 0566 complete
with mounting brackets
SUPPLIER
WESCO
PAYETTE
ORDER
NO.
28711
OATE
ORDER
REMARKS
P506 to
P512
P515
SPARE
STEERING
6 EAR
30HP
R1-R2
R3
R11-R12
R13
R21-R22
R23
PREPARED
S   107
REVISIONS
 CUSTOMER:
BURRARD DRY DOCK                                                          SWITCHBOARD
JOB NO. M6564-D
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
ITEM
SITE:
^SC
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
PAGE   8     OF
riptidn-       HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
DATE   March 28/74
U1-
MATERIAL    LIST
ITEM
NO.
QTY.
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLIER
ORDER
NO.
DATE
ORDER
REMARKS
42
1
C.H. toggle Switch, 3 PDT center
"OFF" position, screw terminal
600 A.C.  Cat.  No:   7612 K2
STOCK
PHASE
SEQUENCE
SELECTOR
43
2
Allen Bradley composition resistor 1 watt,
27,000 8HMS, 5% tolerance
n
ii
44
2
Allen Bradley composition resistor 1 watt
75000 OHMS 5% tolerance
ii
ii
45
0
1
Paper capacitor 1000V AC
0.033 microfarad
ii
ii
46
2
Dialco indicator lights candelabra screw
base, screw terminals with jewel  color
clear (less bulb)(N0T ETCHED-SMOOTH)
H
PHASE
SEQUENCE
SELLECTOR
47
2
Neon bulbs, k watt, shape T-4i, 105-125 V.
candelabra screw base type NE-45
M
ii
48
5
Contactor/relay size 5 model UC05, 4 pole
relay open type 120VAC-60 HZ, 4 contacts N.C.
SHERLEY
CONTROL
CA?/ j C/?3
CRC
49
1
Same as above except contact arrangement to
be 4 contacts N.0.
ii
cf<2
&
S<
Molded fuse unit 30A, 600 Cat.  No: C-30H
EN6LISH
ELECTRIC
(STOCK)
PREPARED
REVISIONS   it     q,7v    wASk     +9       OCT24/7Y
S   107
 CUSTOMER:
BURRARD DRY DOCK                                                          SWITCHBOARD
JOB NO. M6564-D
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
ITEM
SITE:
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
PAGE
9     OF
y-RIPTinw-      HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
DATE March 28/74
MATERIAL    LIST
ITEM
NO.
QTY.
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLIER
ORDER
NO.
DATE
ORDER
REMARKS
51
47
Cartridge fuse link type "C" 6 amps.  600 AC
Cat.   No:  C1A-6
ENGLISH
ELECTRIC
(STOCK)
52
l
Santon key type rotary swttch Cat. No:
SRP 1* .'."•■'. (on/off switch) removable key
on off position witb escutcheon as per
DWG ST-38A, switch to be as per DWG ST-35A
*   SRP hg/82.BR/rk
CROMPTON
PARKINSON
28708
SYNC.
53
6
Cartridge fuse link type "C" 30 amps.
600 AC.  Cat. No: CIA-30
ENGLISH
ELECTRIC
(STOCK)
6
2000
ft.
Wire "TSW'i 600V., BLACK, #14 AWG,  41  STRANDS
STOCK
55
1600
ft.
Wire "7Wr600V., Black,  #14 AW6,  7 STRANDS
n
56
10ft.
BUS BAR 2" x k CU- 1  Length
H
57
60 ft
.  BUS BAR H"x i" CU- 6 Length's
M
58
30ft.
BUS BAR 1" x i" CU- 3 Length's
ii
59
2gal.
SIC0 LI6HT GREY LACQUER NO. ML 279
ii
D>
18
Square D positive pressure fuse clips with
springs 600 V.-200A-BLADE TYPE
PLAYFORD
28709
PREPARED                    REVISIONS    £,     ^ry   My/J6    ^
S   107
 CUSTOMER
BURRARD DRY DOCK
SITE:
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
SCRIPTION:     HULL 212 MAIN SWITCHBOARD
SWITCHBOARD
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
job no. M6564-D,.
ITEM
PAGE   10   OF
DATE March 28/74
ITEM
NO.
V
61
62
63
{.V
D
0
QTY
12
9ft,
Oi
MATERIAL    LIST
DESCRIPTION
Lug ITT-Blackburn Cat.  No:  L-250 I.T.T,
Wire SHFS 66, 133 strands, color grey
Resistances.  10K - 25 Watts
C/4R1RID6 1      Fvsf     L/A//C    TvAfC
>s  fiMP Coo 'An      A)C Fo .  C/A-/F
>-r-        /•
- eU   ot
Control    ni u Fj F-    [Dt    -
Iron ■'• fo '- " '' - f       c - .-
A
.,/.-.,/v. I
I   •■;•■,"■ '■■   ■ ■     ■
cr.)*
£l        /7 Cm
:i c
'-> f/V
SUPPLIER
STOCK,
STOCK
Fncii% tf
'       7 f /--
{ I
ORDER
NO.
DATE
ORDER
REMARKS
/
r e r ■>-"! J <? d
Tiyy> !»    k>
ir s fa '/'
PREPARED
S   107
REVISIONS
 N636  DRILL 2 HOLES
/
MATERIAL
N°
CD
«
j
>
\—i f
1                                  1
-©-                   ~e>
i                        1
1
3 "
*~'6     -J-kv
GRAVOPLY   j^6 OR      ^2
n
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
'A"                *
BRASS    l^.
lb
ADHESIVE    TAPE
x|     MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
c
REMARKS
* i
3
VOLTMETER
3"
r
1/H
FI6.  32
2
3
AMMETER
II
ii
ii
n        it
3
3
WATT METER
II
ii
J
ii        M
4
3
FREQUENCY METER
II
ii
n
M        n
5
3
GENERATOR HEATER
ON
ll
ii
n
"      31
NAME PLATES
FORM     27!
BEDARD     GIRARD     LTD
MANUFACTURING          DIVISION
HULL 212
M6564-D045-30A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
/
MATERIAL
N°
1
CD
%   »
■
-o-                   -e>-
i                        1
i
3"             ^-
*~16       -1 kv
GRAVOPLY   Jx;6 OR      ^2
n
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
'A"               ■*
BRASS    J<_
1 b
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
c
REMARKS
6
4
POWER AVAI
i
LABLE BREAKER CLOSED
-2
6"
V
/16
FI6. 32
7
1
120V    6R0UND    LAMPS
C                B              A
3"
ii
M
"      31
8
1
600V    6R0UND LAMPS
C                B              A
n
n
H
H        M
9
1
SWBD  ILLUMINATION
ii
n
M
"      32
10
3
REVERSE POWER RELAY
ii
M
ii
n         ii
NAMEPLATES
1        FORM     271
BEDARD     GIRARD      LTD
MANUFACTURING         DIVISION
HULL 212
i
M6564-D045-31A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
/
MATERIAL
N°j
*CD
/                                 1
-o-                           ~-(t>  -4-
GRAVOPLY   J^6 OR     3^2
11
1
•
1                                   I
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
o
'A"                "H
~~16       -1 IM
BRASS    P.
lb
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
c
REMARKS
11
i
SYNCHROSCOPE
3"
i"
1/lt
FI6.  32
12
i
SYNCHRONIZING
RELAY
ii
ii
11
"      31
13
n
DARK
ii
ii
II
ii      H
i
SYNCHRONIZING    LAMPS
BEFORE OPERATING "52CS"
KRAVOPI Y
14
3
TO "CLOSE", TURN HANDLE
TO  "TRIP"  POSITION    TO
4"
i"
11
NO-13
(RED)
RESET MECHANISM
15
1
6ENERAT0R NO.  1
7"
ii"
II
FI6.  71
NAME PLATES
FORM     2 71.,
o
BEDARD     GIRARD      LTD
HULL    212
MANUFACTURING         DIVISION
M6564-D045-32A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
/
MATERIAL
N°
X
CD
~f- '
t                                1                              t
-O-                              —ff>   -4
GRAVOPLY  j^6 OR     ^j2
n
]
•
1                                      1
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
o
M     '                                                                                                       ■            *                                           111
'A"               ^
~~16       -1 t-C
BRASS    j<.
lb
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
c
REMARKS
16
i
GENERATOR NO.  2
7"
ii"
1/K
FIG.  71
17
i
GENERATOR NO.  3
H
H
n
H      ii
■   ■
o
GENERATOR BREAKER NO. 1
18
i
LTD  270A -"TOsec
FL-180A                         STD 4ooA
P-051      2>C*ZS0MCr1    IN ST 24*oA"
n
n
H
n      H
GENERATOR BREAKER NO.  2
19
i
LTD   270A-7o sec
H
ii
H
ii        ii
i
FL-180A                          ^TD  4-ooA
P-052      3d»250HCr1   IN5T24odA
GENERATOR BREAKER NO.  3
20
i
LTD    27oA-7osec
FL-180A                         STD   4ooA
P-053      lc*zsoMcn LMS.T. 2.fooA
ii
ii
H
it        H
NAMEPLATES
FORM     271
o
BEDARD     GIRARD     LTD
MANUFACTURING         DIVISION
HULL 212
i
M6564-D045-33A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
-J IM
MATERIAL
GRAVOPLY   J^6 OR      3^2
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
 I6_       8
B&ASS    J
16
N°
n
ADHESIVE   TAPE
ITEM
QTY
MOUNTING   HOLES
INSCRIPTION
B
REMARKS
21
SHORE BREAKER
L-
P-054
T-100A
3C#2
C
I ft" 1/16
FIG.5Z
22
600V DISTRIBUTION
*7»
1
W
7"
hie
FicV 1|.
23
120V DISTRIBUTION
24
MCC NO.  1
L-2&3.8A
T-2257?
P-503
3C#40
3"
1"
42
25
S /iOR£
3
FIG. 32
NAMEPLATES
BEDARD     GIRARD      LTD
MANUFACTURING DIVISION
FORM     271
HULL 212
M6564-D04£-34A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
/
MATERIAL
N°
1
CD
i
. I „ J                                                     '
t                                 1
-O-                              -et>   -4
GRAVOPLY   J^*6 OR      ^
n
J
•
1                                      1
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
'A"               ^
~~16       -J IM
BRASS    j<c
lb
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X|     MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
C
REMARKS
115V EN6INE ROOM
26
i
PANEL
L-46.7A                                     T-70A
P-101                                           3C #6
3"
i"
1/16
FI6. 42
115V MAIN DECK
i
27
T
AFT    LTD PANEL
M
H
ii
H        it
i
L-40.0A                                      T-60A
i
P-102                                          3C #6
NAVI6ATI0N
28
i
L-                                                  T-30A
P-103                                            2C #10
ii
H
a
ii        ii
29
i
L-                                                  T-60A
P-
ti
H
ii
ii        ii
30
i
L-                                                  T-30A
n
H
H
n        ii
P-
NAMEPLATES
FORM     271
BEDARD     GIRARD      LTD
HULL    212
MANUFACTURING         DIVISION
1
M6564-D04S-35A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
MATERIAL
N°
CD
*
*
'
 : , , '
t                         I
-©-                    -®~
1                         I .
3 "
-'*       -J U'c-
GRAVOPLY   i^6 OR      3^2
n
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
'A"               ^
BRASS    j<-
lb
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
c
REMARKS
31
i
120V ACC POWER
DIST PANEL - BOAT DK.
L-                                              T-175A
P-104                                        3C #4/0
3"
i"
1/16'
FI6. 42
32
3
STATIC    R€<SrUI_AToR.
INTERNAL   CONMECTiom      OF
L£AT)i     2o 4- 2. J    om     T2 $   Tl
ReLOCA-T£D     FoR    DIRECT
too   ^OLT      3P'^ASl?       SfiMSIMCV
33
3
K EMULATOR      PT
PRIMARY
fuse   4.A
3
VV
/it
FltV ll
34
1
PHASE SEQUENCE IND.
3"
i"
1/1 €
"      FI6.  32
35
1
ABC
11"
ii
n
"      11
NAMEPLATES
FORM    271
BEDARD     GIRARD     LTD
MANUFACTURING          DIVISION
HULL 212
M6564-D04JT-36A
4\\f)
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
•I
L v
MA1ERIAL
N°
-
'    1
*
T
-©-                         —©--
-!_         1
<
3"            I
""16           J
GRAVOPLY   j^6 OR      ^
n
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
'A"                -1
BRASS    j<c
16
—i   r^ ■•»
ADHES
>IVE    TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES]
ITEM
Q
rr
MAIN
SWBD
EMER
SWBD
INSCRIPTION
A
B
c
REMARKS
36
1
X
i
C              B                A
n 3 ii
'"4
3 II
4
1/16
FIG.  11
37
%
3
X
j
METERIN6 PT'S
PRIMARIES
FUSE 6A
3"
II
ii
„      21
38
3
X
i
60VERN0R & BKR IND.  LTS.
XFMR PRIMARY
BUSE 6A
H
II
H
ii        n
39
3
X
!
BKR CL MECHANISM
XFMR PRIMARY
FUSE 80A
M
II
ii
n        ii
40
3
X
1
6ENERAT0R HEATER
FUSE 6A
ii
II
ii
ii        n
41
1
X
i
SHORE BKR IND.  LTD.
& METERIN6
FUSE 6A
M
II
ii
ii        H
42
2
X
i
PHASE SEQUENCE
FUSE 6A
ii
II
ii
ii        ii
43
1
X
600V    GROUND LAMPS
FUSE 6A
ii
ll
n
ii        M
44
1
X
:
SWBD    ILLUMINATION
FUSE 6A
ii
II
H
n        M
45
1
X
i
i
i
SYNCHRONISING    CIRCUIT
FUSE 6A
ii
II
n
ii        ii
NAMEPLATES
FORM    271 /j
BEDARD     GIRARD      LTD
MANUFACTURING          DIVISION
HULL 212
6564-D045-37A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
MA1ERIAL
N°
o
ca
-
7             '■ „
3>-                             -S>---4.
1                                         .       .
M
GRAVOPLY  j/6 OR     3"J2
11
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC — OR —
16          8
'A"               -1
U--*-              1
■    16          -*| k-c
BRASS    J<,
lb
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
[MAIN
j SWBD
EMER
SWBD
INSCRIPTION
A
B
c
R.EMARKS
46
1
X
I
PREF.  BKR.  TRIP MECHANISM
XFMR PRIMARY
FUSE 6A
3"
i"
1/16
FI6.  21
47
1
X
i
I
1
120V GROUND LAMPS
FUSE 6A
H
n
ii
"      22
48
1
X
i
SPARE
T-50A
H
i"
ii
"     41
o
49
3
X
i
MANUAL VOLT. ADJ.
n
V
M
"      31
50
3
X
i
i
VOLTAGE ADJ.  RHEO.
ii
ii
ii
H        H
51
3
X
i
AUTO/MAN.  SWITCH
H
ii
H
n        H
SI A
3
X
i
G o v£/?a/o#     Control    Sw/rcH
/•
/■
5/B
3
X
i
i
Gen.   BRFAKen  Control  Switch
»
■•
SIC
/
X
i
•
To   i/ENT.    t   OIL   5V5 TSf^)
Fuse   is A
i>
//
'/
"     2.1
5* Fb
3
X
1
i
i
u.                        ^                          fi
*            !             I
u
'/
a
SPfC/Ai_
o
NAMEPLATES
FORM    271 f]
BEDARD     GIRARD      LTD
MANUFACTURING          DIVISION
HULL 212
M6564-W4S-36A
 N°36   DRILL 2 HOLES
-*t k-
ADHESIVE    TAPE
TEM
52
53
54
55
QTY
MOUNTING   HOLES
•MTKmn9jmvmu-M»vmn*
MATERIAL
GRAVOPLY
OR
^32
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16 8
BRASS
INSCRIPTION
A
GEN #1    MONITOR        250 A
2"
B
r
GEN #2 MONITOR   250 A
n        H
GEN #2    MONITOR       2?0 A
LONG TIME:        27oA     10 6ec
SHORT.TIME: .   4-ooA
INSTANTANEOUS:     2 4-00 A
3"
13/8
C
1/16
•BMUWllMl
NAMEPLATES
BEDARD     GIRAF
MANUFACTURING DIVISION
N(
ii
REMARKS
Vfl   U-tTEfcS
FORM     271
HULL 212
M6564-D04S-39A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
/
MATERIAL
N°
CD
»
i
j                                                                             i1                                                     f
t                                 1
-©-                   -e> -^
1                      J_
GRAVOPLY   J^6 OR      ^
n
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
'A"               ^
~~16       -J Uv
o
BRASS    J<.
lb
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
C
REMARKS
56
i
STEERING GEAR PORT
L-                                     INST - 350A
P-501                               3C #4
3"
i "
1/16'
FIG.42L
57
i
STEERING GEAR STBD
L-                                     INST - 350A
P-502                               3C #4
ii
H
ii
n         ii
o
58
i
120V TRANSFORMER
L-60.2A                          T-90A
P-055                              3C #4
H
ii
it
ii         ii
59
i
ACC.  POWER PANEL
P-53-18
L-162.6A                         T-150A
P-505                              36 #2/0
ii
M
H
ii         ii
60
i
MCC NO.  II
ENGINE    ROOM
L-33.6A                         T-tOOA
P-504                             3C #4
ii
n
H
ii
NAMEPLATES
FORM    271
o
BEDARD     GIRARD     LTD
MANUFACTURING          DIVISION
HULL 212
R£S«
1
NP60
TO 9.^1
> T-iooA   INST<
L*DoF7
koA
M6564-D04S-40A
 •
N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
1
MATERIAL
N°
:
CD
..   . j                        '
1                                1
-pv-                        ~-e> --4
GRAVOPLY   j/6 OR      3^2
n
o
1
•
1                               1
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC — OR 4-
16          8
'A"               -»
"16           -J  U'C*
BRASS    j<c
16
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
C
REMARKS
F.W. COMPT
61
i
POWER    PANEL
L-35.1A                                    T-40A
P-516                                          3C #8
3"
i "
1/16'
FIG. 42
TRANS6BRMER
575 30/220 10 30KVA
62
i
n
H
ii
II                 II
L-30.2A                                    T-40A
i   -
P-517                                        3C #8
SEWAGE PUMP
63
i
L-2.6A                                        T-15A
P-506                                          5C*/y
3"
i"
n
"      42
STBY GEARBOX
64
i
L.O.  PUMP  (PORT)
L-8.4A                                        T-15A
P-507                                        3C*/</
ii
n
ii
n        H
STBY GEARBOX
65
i
L.I).   PUMP   (STBD)
L-8.4A                                      T-15A
P-508                                       3c*/y
n
ii
it
n        ii
o
■      <T
NAMEPLATES
FORM     271
BEDARD     GIRARD     LTD
MULL 212
MANUFACTURING         DIVISION
M6564-D04S-41A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
MATERIAL
N°
i
CD
i
1                  ,
-pv                           — fl>   -4
GRAVOPLY   J^6 OR      %*£
n
J
•
1                                   1
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
'A"                ^
~16     -J Uv
BRASS    £.
lb
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
C
REMARKS
ENGINE ROOM           .
66
i >
SPACE HEATERS  (PW
L-6.0A                                    T-15A
P-509                                      3C #12
3"
i"
1/161
FIG.  42
ENGINE ROOM
67
i
SPACE HEATERS  (SfW
L-6.0A                                    T-15A
P-510                                      3C #12
ii
ii
ii
n        ii
STEER GEAR COMPT.
68
i
SPACE HEATER
L-3.0A                                      T-15A
P-511                                        3C #14
ii
ii
ii
ii        ii
OILY WATER
69
i
SEPARATOR
L-2.0A                                      T-15A
P-512
ii
ii
ii
ii        H
PRIMING PUMP  (PORT)
'
70
i
L-14.0A                                  T-20A
P-513                                      3C #10
n
ii
ii
n        ii
NAME PLATES
FORM     27!
BEDA'RD     GIRARD      LTD
HULL 212
MANUFACTURING          DIVISION
i
M6564-D04S"-42A
 N°36  DRILL 2 HOLES
/
MATERIAL
N°
4
1
CD
,'
1
-©-                      -e> -4
GRAVOPLY   J^& OR      ^2
n
J
■
1                            1
3"             *«"
~~16       -J U'c-
LAMINATED   PHENOLIC— OR —
16          8
o
'A'               ^
BRASS    J/
lb
ADHESIVE   TAPE
X
MOUNTING   HOLES
ITEM
QTY
INSCRIPTION
A
B
c
REMARKS
PRIMING PUMP  (STBD)
71
i
L-14A                                          T-20A
P-514                                        3C #10
3"
i"
I/161
FIG. 42
HOT WATER TANK
72
i
ENGINE    ROOM
L-6.0A                                        T-15A
a
ii
n
n        ii
1
P-515                                         3C*/2
73
i
I-                                              T-20A
P-
it
ii
n
ii        ii
74
i
L-                                                T-15A
P-
ii
■I
n
ii        ii
75
i
SHORE
11"
i"
it
76
i
BUS
H
u
ii
NAME PLATES
'        FORM     27!
o
BEDARD     GIRARD     LTD
HULL 212
MANUFACTURING         DIVISION
M6564-D04S"-43A
 ..CUSTOMER:
BURRARD DRY  DOCK                                                          <
SWITCHBOARD
JOB NO. M6564-D
DIVISION
BEDARD-GIRARD LTD.
MONTREAL
ITEM
SITE:
FOR INCAN MARINE LTD.
PAGE
1      OF   1
RIPTIOr
j.       HULL 212
DATE
SPAFF     P/tfiTS        //sr              MATERIAL    LIST
ITEM
NO.
QTY.
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLIER
ORDER
NO.
DATE
ORDER
REMARKS
1
6
Cartridge tfuise link type "C" 30 amps 600
AC Cat.  no: C1A-30
ENGLISH
ELECTRIC
(STOCK)
2
6
Cartridge fuse link type "C" 6 amps 600
AC Cat.  No: C1A-6
ii
3
6
Neon Bulb, i watt, shape T-4i, 105-125 volts
candelabra screw base type NE-45
H
4
0
6
Incandescent bulb, type S6 135 volts, 6
watts, candelabra screw base
H
5
6
Incandescent lamp 125 volts, 10 watts,
medium screw base, clear bulb, shape S-14
M
C
r
C'     C/)7     A/o   ■   C/A -   /S
£    A
1
1
KOLDEX) CASE^REAKeR TlPE Vi"
3POLHISOAF   (bOAT,   THrr»?HAL
MA^rO€.T»CTft\»o   car t\)0  3O0pO\/
COHPLETS    VJlTW   SNc!ruTTR.VPco\U
Rated \zoVAc   akjiD   ttoo'^iroc.
auxiua&v contacts
VJESco
0
PRE PA
RED
revisions*!   tjtJH "j    ADDEND
S   107
 Application Data H-29-660 Page 1
Westinghouse
o*   ®
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
SCB-2500
SCB 2000
SCB 1200
SCB 600
}
Application
Systems Circuit Breakers are a simple solution to a complex problem — coordinated
systems protection. They are designed for
use in switchboards, motor control centers
and other, electrical assemblies. They provide selective tripping and ground fault
protection, as well as excellent coordination
between breakers and other devices in a
system. Because each Systems Circuit
Breaker is rated at 100% of its continuous
current capability, it can be applied in
equipment assemblies up to 100% of its
nameplate rating. The breakers have provisions for fixed or three position drawout
mounting, for manual or electrical operation
and will accept many modifications and
accessories.
Systems Circuit Breakers are designed for
operation on Ac distribution systems of up
to 600 volts. They are not recommended for
use in Dc systems except where the current
monitors can be applied on Ac, as in the
primary of a rectifier transformer where the
actual breaker is applied in the rectifier Dc or
the transformer secondary. For this application, Dc ratings can be applied to the breaker
frame. Refer to Westinghouse for Dc
applications.
Distribution Systems
There are two basic distribution-system
protective arrangements: a fully rated nonselective system and a selective-tripping
system.
Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers are
recommended for use on either system.
A fully rated system is one in which all
breakers — main, tie and branch — have
adequate interrupting current capacity for
the maximum fault current available at the
point of application of the breaker in the
system. For such a system, the Systems
Circuit Breaker's static sensor need provide
only long-delay and instantaneous tripping.
A selective-tripping system is one in which
circuit breakers are applied so that, of the
breakers carrying the fault current, only the
breaker nearest the fault opens to isolate
the faulted circuit from the rest of the power
system. This system results in maximum
continuity of service.
September. 1971
Supersedes October, 1970
Mailed to 201 and 302
~*mnmm>m...   i.
r"j*»
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 2
Systems Circuit Breakers
m
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
00 Volts Ac Maximum
Construction
The basic Systems Circuit Breaker has four
major parts: a frame, a static sensor, current
monitors, and a specially developed flux
transfer shunt trip.
Frame
The frame includes the breaker contacts.
De-ion® arc quenchers, and associated
moving parts that open and close the
breaker contacts, all enclosed in a glass
polyester case.
Static Sensor
The static sensor contains a number of
solid state circuits which act on signals received from the current monitors. As the
current monitors detect overload currents,
short-circuit current, and ground fault currents, signals are passed to the sensor which
act to trip the breaker at the desired time
and current point. The sensor operates
solely from breaker foad current, and is
not dependent on any outside power
source.
Sensorssupplied as standard with Systems
Circuit Breakers provide Long Time Delay
and Instantaneous Pick-up. Other sensors
are available with special trip characteristics
as follows:©
Long Time Delay with Instantaneous Pickup and Ground Current Trip
Long Time Delay and Short Time Delay
Long Time  Delay and  Short Time  Delay
with Ground Current Trip
Long Time  Delay and  Short Time  Delay
with Ground Current Trip and Instantaneous
Pick-up.
Current Monitors
rent flowing in the bus. When above a predetermined level, the induced current is the
signal that causes the breaker to trip. A current monitor is provided for each phase bus.
If optional ground fault protection is selected
and if the system has a neutral, an additional monitor is provided.
Flux Transfer Shunt Trip
This is a special magnetic tripping device
factory-installed in the frame. On signal
from the sensor, it causes the breaker contacts to open. It utilizes a flux-transfer
principle; it therefore operates directly from
the sensor signal only and requires no
external source of power, (see page 4 for
detailed description)
Accessories and Modifications
The following accessories and modifications
are available for use with the Systems Circuit Breaker. Refer to Price List for additional
information.
Front   connections   —   pressure   type
terminals can be supplied in lieu of the std.
rear connector for bus connection.
Motor operators — to "open" or "close"
breaker from a remote point.
Draw out frame — 3  positions, "connected", "test" and "disconnect".
Shunt trip — to trip the breaker from a
remote point.
Undervoltage release — to protect the
breaker and  connected  apparatus  against
damage from low voltage conditions.
Alarm   switch  — to   provide  "light"   or
"alarm"    indication    when    breaker   trips.
"Make" or "break" contacts.
Auxiliary switch — commonly used for
remote  indication  of "open"  or "closed"
breaker, or for electrically interlocking component control circuits.
Kirk Key interlock —■ permits interlocking
of two breakers, or one breaker with other
devices.
Ground fault Indicator — enables the
user to tell if the circuit has had a ground
fault.
Inspection and Maintenance
Good maintenance procedure calls for periodic inspection of all electrical apparatus
including the Systems Circuit Breaker, especially after an unusual circuit condition.
Terminal lugs must be tight to prevent
overheating.
The current monitors are transformers which
produce a current proportional to the cur-
QFm complete details, see P.L. H-29-620, page 1.
Operation
Figure 1, page 3, is a simplified block schematic diagram of the Systems Circuit Breaker. It shows the basic operating sequences
involved in the breaker's tripping functions.
Major elements of the solid state tripping
system are:
1 Current Monitors
2 Auxiliary Transformers
3 Rectifier Bridges
4 Power-and-Signal Circuit
5 Long-Delay Tripping Circuits
6 Short-Delay Tripping Circuits
7 Instantaneous-Tripping Circuit
8 Ground-Tripping Circuit
9 Trigger Circuit
10 Flux-Transfer Shunt-Trip Device
The current monitors are coils similar to
standard through-type current transformers,
are designed" to mount on the rear-connection bus of the circuit breaker. At the
nominal rating of the current monitor, each
monitor's output to the static sensor is 2.5
amperes for the 600 ampere sensor, and
5 amperes for the 1200, 2000 and 2500
ampere sensors. At overloads, the current
monitor's output rises in close proportion to
the overload current through the circuit
breaker. The design of the monitors is such
that the close proportion is maintained up to
overloads of 12 times the breaker nominal
current rating to insure the accuracy of the
tripping characteristics of the entire Systems
Circuit Breaker.
The signal current from the monitors goes
to the auxiliary transformers where it is
stepped down to milliampere levels. The
output of the auxiliary transformers is rectified by the rectifier bridges to direct-current
power for use by the other circuits of the
static sensor.
The power and signal circuit serves two
purposes: First, it acts as the power supply
for energizing the shunt-trip coil. It does
this by charging a capacitor with direct
current supplied by the current monitors,
auxiliary transformers, and rectifiers bridges.
When tripping is called for by the other
static-sensor circuits, the fully-charged capacitor discharges to the shunt coil which
in turn opens the circuit breaker contacts.
Because the capacitor is charged by signal
current which is taken from the bus being
monitored, no outside power source is
needed to operate the shunt-trip unit. The
other sensor circuits also draw operating
power from the capacitor and the rectifier
bridge.
Second, the power-and-signal circuit supplies a signal for the sensing and triggering
circuits.
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 3
Westinghouse
<>
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
Drawout Assembly
Figure 1: Schematic Diagram of Complete Systems Circuit Breaker    (Typical wiring diagrams for other SCB applications, shown on page 21)
Overload-Operation   Sequence
When an overload current appears through
the breaker, the voltage from the rectifiers
increases proportionally to the overload current and acts as a signal to operate timing
circuits in the trip circuits. These timing
circuits, which signal the trigger circuit to
discharge the capacitor through the shunt-
trip coil, cause the breaker to trip according
to the trip curve established by the trip
settings on the static sensor. Operations of
the long-delay, short-delay, and instantaneous trip parts of the sensor are the same
in 3-wire and 4-wire 3-phase distributions
systems.
Ground-Fault Tripping in a 3-Wire
Distribution System
Under normal conditions, i.e., with no
ground fault, all current in the system flows
through poles A, B, and C of the Systems
Circuit Breaker. Correspondingly, these currents are reflected in the three current
monitors, and must all pass through the
primary of the auxiliary transformer (G).
This results in no output from transformer
G because the currents of a 3-phase system
cancel each other out, even when the
circuit load is unbalanced and the current is
not equal in all three phases.
When a ground fault occurs on one phase
of the 3-wire system and one of the other
phases is already grounded, the ground-fault
current will flow in auxiliary transformer G
only. There will then be an uncancelled
current in the secondary of auxiliary transformer G and this will result in a signal to
the power-and-signal circuit. If the fault
current is higher than 20 percent of the
continuous-current rating of the current
monitor, the ground-trip circuit will signal
the trigger circuit to discharge the condenser in the power-and-signal circuit, and
the breaker will trip.
Ground-Fault Tripping in a 4-Wire
Distribution System
Only the addition of a fourth current monitor
on the neutral bus is necessary to apply the
SCB for ground-fault tripping on a 4-wire
power-distribution system. In a 4-wire
power system, current will flow in the neutral
bus when an unbalanced load causes the
3-phase currents to be unequal, even in the
absence of a ground fault. Because this
neutral-line current escapes detection by
the three current monitors in the power lines,
the total current in auxiliary transformer G
would not be zero and the sensor would
falsely report a ground fault. The purpose of
the fourth current monitor is to reflect any
neutral-current to auxiliary transformer G
so that all current components will cancel
when the load is unbalanced and there is
no ground fault.
When a ground fault occurs, the operation
is the same as in the 3-wire power system.
Ground fault current in the neutral appears
in the primary winding of auxiliary transformer G and tripping occurs in the same
sequence as in the 3-wire system. Two important points should be noted about the
neutral-line current monitor:
1. It should be identical to the monitors in
each of the phase lines. Even if its output
deviates by only a few percent from the
output of the line monitors, the differ-
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 4
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
2.
ence could be enough to cause ground-
fault tripping of the breaker instead of
time-delay overload tripping.
Current   monitors   must   be   connected
carefully for proper polarity.
Flux-Transfer Shunt-Trip
Opening Breaker Moves Reset
Arm Down, Armature Up
Connecting Wire Link
Armature Shown in
Contact With U-Frame
Magnetic
U-Frame
Non-Magnetic Material
This Plate Bolts
toCircuit Breaker
L
S,Compressed
Spring
Plunger Strikes
Pad on Trip Bar
Design Flexibility
One important feature sets the Systems
Circuit Breaker apart from conventional circuit breakers—the adjustability of all trip
characteristics, including ground fault. The
static sensor has a maximum of six adjustment controls. These controls permit changing of the tripping characteristics over a broad
range. Instead of the limited curves of conventional breakers, the Systems Circuit
Breaker can be adjusted to have one of an
infinite number of curves, as shown in the
graph in figure 2, for example. In other words,
a Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breaker can
be one of any number of circuit breakers, depending on how the trip characteristic adjustment controls are set.
The tripping characteristics that can be
changed are discussed in detail on the following pages.
The shunt-trip device used in the Systems
Circuit Breaker permits tripping the breaker
with a low-energy electrical signal. The
illustration shows the trip device in the
RESET position. It is held in this position by
the two permanent magnets, M1 and M2.
Their magnetic flux lines pass through the
U-shaped frame and the magnetic sleeve of
the armature, and because the UP position
is the shortest magnetic path, the armature
is held up against the top of the U-frame.
Compressed spring S stores the energy for
tripping the breaker. It is held compressed
by the permanent magnets which exert a
slightly stronger force than the spring does.
When direct current from the capacitor in
the static sensor passes through the pulse
coil C, an electromagnetic flux is set up in a
direction opposite to the flux of the permanent magnets. This opposing flux weakens the magnetic force exerted on the armature, the spring overcomes the magnetic
force and forces the armature down.
Plunger P at the end of the armature strikes
the trigger release rocker in the trip unit, and
trips the contacts open. As the contacts
open, part of the moving mechanism strikes
reset arm R in a downward direction, raises
the armature, compresses the spring, and
resets the device. The circuit breaker is
immediately ready for tripping again.
Control no. 6
ground-current time
Control no 1: long-delay pickup point
Control no. 2: long-delay tripping time
Control no. 3 short-delay pickup point
t Control no. 4 short-delay tripping time
j Control no. 5 instantaneous-trip pickup
Current
Figure 2: This composite curve shows the tripping adjustments available. Arrows show
which sections of curve are moved by the various sensor adjustment controls.
J
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 5
C^
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
Long-delay tripping
characteristics'
The long-delay tripping characteristics are
regulated by two adjustment controls-
number 1 and number 2.
Control number 1—long-delay
pickup current
Control number 1 establishes the lowest load
current at which the breaker will trip. Its
effect on the time-current curves is indicated
by the dotted sections of the curves in
figure 3.
As the vertical lines A and B show, the pickup
point can be varied between 0.5 times and
1.2 times the breaker current monitor rating.
The tripping time at the pickup current level
depends on the setting of control number 2.
Control number 2—long-delay
time control
Moving control number two varies the time
it will take the breaker to trip. The graph
(figure 3) shows how different settings of
the control move the curve from a minimum
time (line C) to a maximum time (line D).
The slope is constant; that is, all possible
curves between C and D always have the
same slope.
The control is calibrated in number of
seconds to trip when the current is 6 times
the current-monitor rating. For example, if
the control is set on "2," the breaker would
trip in 2 seconds (at 6 times the monitor
rating),if the control setting were changed
to "20," the breaker would trip in 20 seconds (at 6 times monitor rating).
Controls 1 and 2, used together, permit adjustment of the breaker to match the power
system's overcurrent conditions to prevent
overheating of transformers, conductors, and
other system components. For example, controls 1 and 2 can be set so that the lowest
tripping current and longest trip time are
3000 seconds at %x the monitor rating or
they can be 43 seconds at 1.2* or any combination in between as represented by the
shaded area in the graph.
As the curves show, when a specific over-
current continues for the length of time
established by the setting of control number
2, the breaker trips and opens the circuit.
If an overcurrent vanishes before the breaker
trips, the timing circuits in the static sensor
cancel the accumulated time, return to a
normal condition, and wait for the next over-
current to occur.
10000 --
1000--
100--
s   io--
•-   1.0 --
.01--
Controlno. 1—
Long-delay pickup (X rating)
(5>
h—i  i i nun—i  i i 'in i
Control no. 2—
Long-delay time (seconds)
-2 seconds
<5)
x
5
I   I  I llilll 1   I I MINI
Current (multiples of current monitor rating)
Figure 3: Long-delay characteristics
 Application Data H 29-660    Page 6
J
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
•
Short-delay tripping
characteristics
Short-delay time-current characteristics are
determined by adjustment of controls 3 and
4. (Refer to Page 1 to determine which
breakers have short-time rating characteristics.) These controls permit adjusting
breakers for coordinated tripping on overloads and faults. Short-delay characteristic
curves are shown in figure 4.
All breakers provided with short-time adjustment that do not have an instantaneous
adjustment are equipped with a fixed instantaneous circuit that functions at a
value of approximately 21 times the current monitor rating. This feature allows
the short-time rated SCB breakers to be
applied to systems having short-circuit
capabilities up to the instantaneous rating
of the breaker.(shown in figure 4).
Fault closing discriminator circuit
All breakers provided with short-time adjustment have static sensor units equipped
with discriminator circuits on fault closing.
Should a breaker with these features be
closed on a fault above approximately 8
times the current monitor rating, the short
delay would be bypassed, and the breaker
would trip instantaneously.
Control, number 3—short-delay
pickup-current adjustment
Setting of control number 3 establishes the
lowest fault current at which the breaker will
trip. It is adjustable from 1 x current monitor
rating (line E) through 7x current monitor
rating (line F).
Control number 4—short-delay
time adjustment
Turning control number 4 varies the short-
delay tripping time of the breaker and can
adjust the breaker from a minimum of 0.03
second (curve G) continuously through a
maximum of 0.16 second (10 cycles)
(curve H).
Figure 4 shows that the short-delay trip
time is practically constant for all values of
fault current. Curve G shows the characteristic
at the minimum setting of 0.03 second (2
cycles). Curve H shows the characteristic at
the maximum setting of 0.16 second (10
cycles). Trip curves will be parallel to curves
G and H at all other settings between 2
and 10.
1.0
.01  --
.001
•
Control no. 3—
Short-delay pickup (X-rating)
Control no. 4—
Short-delay pickup (cycles)
 10 cycles-
y®
-2 cycles -
©~
"^":
-<D
.oix .ix i.ox
Current (multiples of current
monitor rating)
Figure 4: Short-delay characteristics
H ^_
10X 21x
100X
•
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 7
y
Westinghouse
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
Instantaneous tripping
characteristics
The Systems Circuit Breaker sensor provides
instantaneous tripping without any intentional time delay—that is, the tripping time is
essentially the same for all fault currents
above the pickup setting. Adjustment control
number 5 permits selection of the current at
which the breaker will trip. (See figure 5).
This pickup point can be varied from 1 x the
current monitor rating (line I) to 12x the
current monitor rating (line K).
Setting of static sensor control number 5
selects a particular point on the curve. In
figure 5, for example, a setting of 5.5 on the
control (line J) would cause the breaker to
trip after the load current reached 5.5 x the
current monitor rating.
Ground-fault tripping
characteristics
Ground-fault protection is an extremely important feature of the Westinghouse Systems
10000 --
1000--
100
a     1.0
.01 --
.001
Control no. 5—
Instantaneous pick-up
(x monitor rating)
O
-t-
-t-
Circuit Breaker. Its purpose is to protect
power-system components from damage and
fire when an arcing phase-to-ground fault
occurs. The arc current is less than the value
of load current at which the breaker's long-
delay pickup would normally be set to trip.
SCB's with ground-fault protection have a
setting low enough to trip on the low ground-
fault currents.
The pickup load current for ground-fault
tripping is fixed at 20 percent of the current
monitor rating. (See figure 6.) The tripping
time is variable and is adjustable by control
number 6. The limits of adjustment are from
0.1 second (6 cycles) (curve L) through 0.5
second (30 cycles) (curve M). For instance,
when a current equal to, or greater than,
.2 times the current monitor rating appears
in the ground bus, the breaker will trip within
0.1 to .5 second, depending upon where
control number 6 is set.
When ground-fault tripping is used the
neutral should be installed  in accordance
10000
1000
100
10
■=     1.0
.01 ■-
.001
with the following Canadian Electrical Code
Part 1 requirements — Rules 10-010,
10-024, 10-028, & 10-030.
An awareness of the Canadian Electric Code
installation requirements for a neutral in a
three phase, four wire, distribution system,
and how a multiple grounded neutral can
cause nuisance tripping to ground fault
relaying will ensure trouble free operation.
Ground Trip Indicator
The GT-I is an option which can be obtained
on SCB Static Sensors that have the
Ground Trip circuit. It enables the user to
tell if the Circuit has had a ground fault. If a
ground fault occurs of sufficient magnitude
to cause the static sensor to start timing but
not of sufficient duration to cause the system
circuit breaker to trip, the GT-I will indicate
this fault.
The GT-I requires the application of 120 Vac
control power to the Static Sensor (units
with this option only). This is connected
between D1 and D2. The indicator is connected, in series with a SPST switch, used to
reset the GT-I, between TP3, and TP4. See
Fig. 11. (indicator light and reset switch
must be ordered separately)
Control no. 6—
Ground-fault tripping time (seconds)
+•-4-
®
©
-I-
+
01X
1X 1.0X 5.5X 12X 100X
Current (multiples of current monitor rating)
Figure 5: Instantaneous-tripping characteristics
.01X .05X   .1X .2X 1.0X 100X
Current (multiples of current monitor rating)
Figure 6: Ground-fault tripping characteristics
J
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 8
Systems Circuit Breakers
>
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Pole Only
JDO Volts Ac Maximum
f
nil
Application Considerations
In the design of power-distribution-system
protection and in the selection and application of Westinghouse Systems Circuit
Breakers.thefollowing should beconsidered:
Power-system Voltage
Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers are
designed for operation on Ac distribution
systems of up to 600 volts. They are not
recommended for use in Dc systems except
where the current monitors can be applied
on alternating current as in the primary of a
rectifier transformer where the actual breaker
is applied in the rectified direct current on
the transformer secondary. (For this application, Dc ratings can be applied to the
breaker frame. Refer to Westinghouse.)
Normal-load Current
The normal-load current that a power-
distribution circuit is to carry should be the
first consideration in selecting a breaker of
the proper current rating, and in choosing
current monitors of proper rating for use
with the static sensor.
The specific ampere rating of a breaker for a
given use depends upon the type of load and
duty cycle. It is governed by the Canadian
Electric Code which in general, requires
overcurrent protection at the.supply terminals
and at points where wire sizes become
smaller. The code alsq requires that conductors be protected according to their
current-carrying capacity, but it lists exceptions for certain applications; for example : motor circuits where a larger breaker
rating is often required to override motor
inrush currents. The overload capacity of
generators, motors and transformers should
also be taken into account.
Short-circuit Current
One of the most difficult factors to determine
is the short-circuit current a given system
will require a breaker to interrupt. The short-
circuit current is the maximum possible
current the power source can put through
the breaker. A knowledge of the impedances
of cables, buses, generators, transformers,
and of motor feedback current, if any, is
necessary to calculate accurately the available short-circuit current. The presence of
impedance in a fault or arc can appreciably
reduce the available short-circuit current
below the calculated value. However, the
current-limiting effects of fault or arc
impedance are unpredictable, and therefore
ould not be used in determining the
rrent-interrupting demands on a breaker,
he required interrupting ratings of the
breakers should be — and usually are —
calculated on the basis of bolted faults at
the point of application. Refer to H-29-061
for fault-current calculations.
Rated Interrupting Current
The interrupting rating of a breaker states in
amperes the maximum current that the
breaker can interrupt at a specified voltage.
Canadian Standards Association has standard short-circuit-current requirements for
applying breakers. C.S.A. standards are
based on symmetrical interrupting ratings.
The rated short-circuit current of a low-
voltage circuit breaker is the maximum
value of available rms symmetrical current
that the circuit breaker shall be required to
interrupt at one-half cycle after fault inception at the rated maximum voltage and
rated frequency. Although the rated short-
circuit current is expressed in symmetrical
amperes, the circuit breaker shall be able to
interrupt all values of asymmetrical current
as well as symmetrical current produced by
three-phase or single-phase circuits having
short-circuit power factor of 15 percent or
greater (X/R ratio 6.6 or less) at rated
maximum voltage.
Most low-voltage circuit breakers are applied
on systems where the X/R ratio under
short-circuit conditions is safely less than
6.6. The application tables on pages 11
through 14 have been provided for quick
estimation of the maximum available short-
circuit current on standard low-voltage
transformer installations. The Systems Circuit Breakers recommended in these tables
have adequate symmetrical and asymmetrical ratings for all types of standard
liquid- and dry-type Westinghouse transformers.
Rated Continuous Current
Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers are
rated at maximum continuous-current-
carrying capacity. For example, when an
SCB-600 breaker is rated at 600 amperes
continuous-current capacity, it means that
the contacts of the breaker will carry up to
600 amperes continuously for an indefinitely
long time, and the monitors will withstand
a proportionately induced current indefinitely. The continuous-current rating also carries
with it the assurance that the breaker will
open and close within its interrupting rating
and maintain its current-carrying parts in
good condition so that its continuous-
current capacity is basically unimpaired.
The static sensor and its long-delay adjustment controls allow for considerable variation of overload settings (from 50 percent
to 120 percent of the current-monitor name-
plate rating at which the breaker will trip).
This adjustability can be used to advantage
to maintain continuity of service when
normal load surges are of a duration and
magnitude that will not harm the circuit
components that the breaker is protecting.
Care should be exercised so that the static
sensor is not set for pickup at a current
higher than the current-monitor and breaker
continuous-current rating. Both the current
monitor and the current-carrying parts of
the breaker cannot continuously carry
current that is higher than their continuous-
current rating without exceeding the allowable temperature rise. Systems Circuit
Breakers properly applied will normally have
frame ratings at least equal to or in excess of
the rated continuous load current of the
apparatus or circuits that the breakers are
protecting.
Interrupting-current Rating
The interrupting duty cycle of a circuit
breaker with instantaneous tripping for fault
currents shall consist of an opening operation at or within its rated interrupting
current followed by a close-open operation
after a 2-minute interval. The standard
interrupting duty cycle of a circuit breaker
with delayed tripping for fault currents is the
same as for instantaneous tripping except
that the tripping is delayed by the associated
tripping devices.
After any performance at or within its
interrupting rating, the circuit breaker shall:
1. Be in substantially the same mechanical
condition as at the beginning of the
operation.
2. Be capable of withstanding rated continuous voltage in the open position and of
carrying its rated continuous current at its
rated voltage for a limited time, but not
necessarily without exceeding the rated
temperature rise (50°C).
It should be recognized that the opening of
a breaker at or very near its interrupting-
current rating may reduce the current-
carrying capacity and interrupting ability,
therefore the current-carrying parts should
be inspected and repaired or replaced, if
necessary.
Short-time-current Rating
This is the number of amperes of fault
current that a breaker can successfully carry
for one-sixth of a second when operated in a
standard duty cycle. The standard duty cycle
requires that a breaker maintain rated short-
time current during a duty cycle consisting
of two periods of 10 cycles each with a
15-second "open" interval of zero current
between the 10-cycle "closed" periods.
 -r» ffliHiiiMMirmnTiiTT^itiH.^^
Application Data H-29-660    Page 9
3
Westinghouse
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
J
Calculations of maximum available short-
circuit currents should consider the impedance of distribution-system cable and/or
bus duct, and apparatus between the power
source and the breaker. The current contributed by motors should also be included.
Methods of calculation of fault currents in
example systems are presented in H-29-061.
Ground-fault Protection
Ground-fault currents are generally initiated
at a very low current level, much lower than
the trip settings of standard circuit breakers.
Completely coordinated electrical systems
should be equipped with low-level ground-
fault protective devices which have tripping
times coordinated for ground-fault selective
tripping for maximum protection and continuity of service. For maximum service continuity, it is essential that only the faulted
portion of a distribution system be removed
from service as a result of a ground-fault
condition. Systems Circuit Breakers equipped with ground-fault protective sensors
can be easily coordinated since each device
functions at a fixed percentage of its current
monitor rating (20 percent) and since each
has an independent adjustable time-delay
setting which can be varied from 6 to 30
cycles.
'Power-system Frequency
The ratings of Westinghouse Systems Circuit
Breakers a're established at 60 Hz. Their
application to 50-Hz systems requires no
special    considerations    because    breaker
Source
capacities and characteristics are essentially
the same at 50 Hz as at 60 Hz.
Types of Distribution-System
Protective Arrangements
The degree of service continuity, coordination, and system initial cost will
determine which one of three basic distribution-system protective arrangements
will be selected. Classified by protective
arrangement, a distribution system may be:
1. A cascade system.
2. A fully rated system.
3. A selective-tripping system.
Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers are
recommended for fully rated systems and for
selective-tripping systems. They are not
recommended for cascade systems.
1. Cascade System
This is a type of system that has been allowed
in the application of certain types of circuit
breakers where continuity of service is not a
factor. In general, this is a nonpreferred
system and is therefore not recommended
in the application of Systems Circuit
Breakers.
2. Fully Rated System
A fully rated system is one in which all
breakers — main, tie, and branch breakers —
have adequate interrupting-current capacity
for the maximum fault current available at
Feeder breaker
Group-feeder
breaker
Feeder breaker
Feeder breaker
Source
Feeder breaker
Y    Group-feeder
breaker
Figure 7: Fully Rated Nonselective Systems
the point of application of the breaker in the
system.
Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers are
adaptable to fully rated systems within their
ratings. For a fully rated system, Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers use only
long-delay and instantaneous tripping, and
do not contain short-delay-tripping sensor
circuits. On overloads, selective tripping of
the branch breaker before the main breaker
is obtained through adjustment of the long-
delay pickup and long-delay time controls so
that the branch breaker will usually trip
first. (Under some overload conditions the
main breaker could trip.)
When faults occur, whether the branch
breaker trips before the main breaker depends
upon the relative instantaneous-trip settings
of the breakers and the current level and
rate of rise of the faul' current. In general,the
branch breaker will trip first at the lower
fault-current levels. Faults that yield an
abnormally high current could cause the
main breaker to trip and disrupt service over
a wider part of the distribution system.
3. Selective-tripping System
In a selective-tripping system, circuit breakers
are applied so that, of the breakers carrying
the fault current, only the breaker nearest the
fault opens to isolate the faulted circuit from
the rest of the power system. This system
results in maximum continuity of service
with a slightly higher initial cost than a fully
rated system.
One of the principal advantages of Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers is their
selective-tripping capability. Their application to selective-tripping systems is
subject to the following requirements :
1. Each circuit breaker must have an interrupting rating equal to, or greater than, the
short-circuit current available at the point of
application of the breaker in the system.
Figure 7 illustrates fully rated systems. The
main group-feeder, and feeder breaker of
such systems should be selected to have
interrupting and continuous-current ratings
above the current levels they will be
required to carry continuously or interrupt.
These breakers may be equipped with static
or thermal tripping devices, depending upon
the current-carrying capacity of the circuit
or system to be protected. Determination of
the interrupting- and continous-current
ratings of the breakers follows the same
principles and procedures as the determination of the same ratings in selective-
tripping systems, explained on pages 10 to
13.
 .Application Data H-29-660 Page 10
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
-600 Volts Ac Maximum
1
«
2. Each circuit breaker must have a short-
time-current rating equal to, or greater than,
the short-circuit current available at the
point of application of the breaker. This
requirement does not apply to feeder
breakers that have instantaneous-tripping
circuits in the static-sensor units.
3. There must be no overlapping of the
time-current curves of the various breakers
as established by settings of the adjustment
controls. That is, the breaker nearest the
fault must open to clear the fault, while
breakers nearer the source of power remain
closed and continue to carry the load of
unfaulted circuits.
4. A maximum of four circuit breakers in
series may be operated — one of these may
be a feeder breaker with instantaneous
tripping.
5. Circuit breakers must be coordinated with
the rest of the protective devices of the
distribution system. For example, circuit
breakers   on   the   low-voltage   side   of   a
Selective main
breaker
transformer bank should be coordinated
with relays or fuses on the high-voltage side.
6. The electrical load should be distributed
so that relative continuous-current ratings
of the various breakers can give the required
selectivity. For this reason, selective-tripping
requirements should be considered early in
the design of the power-distribution system.
Figure 8 illustrates selective-tripping systems.
Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers,
with their static sensors and adjustability
features, can be used to best advantage in
such systems. The selective main and
selective group-feeder breakers must be
equipped with static sensors and must be
chosen to have adequate ratings for interrupting current, short-time current, and
continuous current. Systems Circuit Breakers
for use in selective-tripping systems are
always equipped for long-delay tripping and
short-delay tripping. Instantaneous tripping
can be added as a further refinement on the
characteristic curve. Application of Systems
Circuit Breakers to selective-tripping systems
is illustrated on pages 10 to'13.
Feeder breaker
Selective group-
feeder breaker
Feeder breaker
-0
Feeder breaker
Source
Q  Rp
Feeder breaker
Selective group-
feeder breaker
Figure 8: Selective-tripping Systems
Selective-Tripping Coordination with Primary Fuses
As a rule, a fuse rated at approximately 200
Qcent  of  the  transformer  rated   current
sed    on   the   transformer   self-cooled
ng) will override the transformer magnetizing   inrush   current   and   still   provide
adequate fault protection. Once the proper
primary fusing has been selected, the
Systems Circuit Breakers should be coordinated with it — that is, all breakers
should trip before the fuses when a fault
occurs anywhere on the load side of the
transformer-secondary main breaker.
In a selective-trip system where maximum
service continuity is required, the transformer-secondary main Systems Circuit
Breaker should be one with a static sensor
having short-delay selective-trip features.
The sensors should be selected and set to:
1. Furnish overload protection for the
transformer.
2. Furnish short-circuit and arcing-fault
protection for the bus and feeder breakers.
3. Coordinate effectively with the feeder or
group-feeder Systems Circuit Breakers; the
time-current curves of their respective static
sensors should not overlap.
4. Give the best possible coordination with
the primary fuses (that is, the breaker should
clear a secondary fault before there is any
risk of damaging the fuse thermally). To
insure safe selective tripping between the
primary fuse and a transformer-secondary
main breaker, the total clearing time of the
breaker should be less than the short-time
curve of the fuse for all values of current up
to the maximum value of symmetrical fault
current that can flow through the transformer to a secondary-circuit fault. Figure 9
shows a schematic diagram of a hypothetical system, the fuse curves, and breaker
curves when static sensors are set as indicated in figure 9.
The short-time curve of the fuses lies below
the main melting-time curve. This curve
takes into account such factors as preloading
and gives adequate margin for coordination
purposes. Some manufacturers do not give
short-time curves of their fuses; in such
cases, the total clearing time of the low-
voltage breaker should be less than 75
percent of the time indicated by the
minimum-melting-time curve of the primary
fuse.
Because the time-current characteristic
curves of Systems Circuit Breakers with
selective static sensors are variable over a
broad range, crossover of breaker and fuse
curves can usually be avoided. Complete
selectivity, with no overlapping of the
characteristic curves of the primary fusing
and the transformer-secondary main Systems
Circuit Breaker, may not always be possible
because of the differences in the shapes of
their characteristic curves. A fuse of higher
current rating should not be arbitrarily
selected to get complete selectivity at the
expense of sacrificing adequate protection.
When a little overlapping cannot be
avoided, the designer should specify that
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 11
1
Westinghouse
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
J
primary fuses be replaced with new fuses of
the same rating as a matter of operating
procedure whenever the transformer-
secondary main Systems Circuit Breaker trips
for a switchboard-bus fault, as there is a
possibility of damaging, but not blowing,
the fuses. As bus faults are rare in enclosed
switchboard assemblies, the probabilities of
this condition occurring are very low.
Group-feeder and feeder Systems Circuit
Breakers off the main bus should also be
selected and their static sensors set for
complete coordination with the transformer-
primary fuses.
Determining Requirements and
Ratings of Systems Circuit Breakers
As the example schematic diagram in
figure 9 shows, the distribution system under
consideration consists of primary fuses, a
transformer, and circuit breakers having the
ratings and characteristics shown. The
determination of the continuous-current,
interrupting-current, and short-time requirements and breaker ratings is discussed in the
following paragraphs. A series of tables has
been prepared to simplify selection of
breakers. These tables — which are referred
to in the explanation — are on pages 17
to 20.
Continuous-Current Requirements
and Ratings
Primary Fuses: Because the transformer
rated current on the primary side is 43.7
amperes, the primary switch would come
equipped with a RBA-400 fuseholder and a
80E refill. The characteristics of this fuse are
shown by curve A, figure 10.
Secondary main feeder breaker: The continuous-current rating of the transformer
secondary winding is found to be 962
amperes. (See table F on page 20. Read
column 3 when column 1 is 1000 @ 5.75
percent.) As a rule, transformer-secondary
main breakers should have a continuous
current rating of 1.25 to 1.33 times the
continuous-current rating of the transformer.
On this basis, a circuit breaker with a
continuous-current rating of 1200 amperes
(962 x 1.25 = 1200) is required. Therefore,
an SCB-1200 is tentatively selected with a
1200-ampere current monitor, subject to
the interrupting-current requirements.
Group-Feeder Breakers: Assume that
the largest group-feeder breaker required
has a continuous-current rating of 600
amperes.   Here,   from   the   standpoint   of
continuous current, either an SCB-600 or
SCB-1200 could be selected.
Feeder Breakers at the Distribution
Panelboard: Assume that the largest
breaker is a 225-ampere feeder. For this
application, an AB molded-case breaker,
Type JA was selected.
Interrupting- and Short-Time
Current Requirements
Primary Fuse: It is assumed that the
primary system short-circuit power available
will not exceed approximately 500 MVA
therefore, a type RBA-400 fuse is selected
because it is rated to interrupt 29,400
amperes at 13.2 Kv vented or with discharge filter and is adequate (29,400 amps
x 13.2 Kv x \/3 = 670 MVA).
The primary fuse gives short-circuit protection to the transformer and also provides
arcing-fault protection for the transformer
secondary winding and for the conductors
to the low-voltage distribution switchboard.
Secondary Main Breaker: The short
circuit current at the main switchboard
breaker will be from the transformer alone —
no motor feed back being seen at this point
when the fault is at ©. This may be calculated
to be 16200 amps. rms. sym.
An SCB 1200 was selected on the basis of
continuous current requirements. Its interrupting rating of 22,000 amps r.m.s.
symmetrical is adequate.
Group Feeder Breaker: The combined
short circuit current at the switchboard bus
is 20,048 amps r.m.s. symmetrical (16,200
amp transformer and 3,848 amps motor
contribution) An SCB-600 was selected on
the basis of continuous current requirements
Its interrupting rating of 22,000 amps r.m.s.
symmetrical is adequate.
The other group-feeder breakers shown
may be Systems Circuit Breakers with static
sensors having either long-delay and
instantaneous features or standard AB
breakers with conventional thermal-magnetic devices, as required by the job
specifications.
Branch Breakers at the Distribution
Panelboard Bus: The largest branch
breaker selected is a Type JA having an
interrupting-current rating of 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical at 600 volts. This
breaker has a standard thermal-magnetic
trip device.
If the distribution panelboard were located
at a distance from the supply switchboard so
that the cable impedance would be suffici
ent to limit the available short-circuit current
to 14,000 amp rms symmetrical, then
standard Type FB breakers could be
applied. Depending on the location of the
panelboard and the number of circuits
supplied from the group-feeder breaker, a
main breaker could be placed in the
distribution panelboard. Such a main
breaker would require coordination with the
selective group-feeder breaker.
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 12
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
»
System Diagram
Utility connection — data from utility: 13.2 Kv, 500 MVA.
Primary
Disconnect
I
Primary Fuse
Transformer — nameplate data: 1000 Kva, 13.2 Kv to 600 V.
rTpH   3-phase 5.75% impedance, 43.7 amps primary current
Distribution Switchboard
f
Distribution Panelboard
1. Fault current available due to transformer alone 16,800 amperes symmetrical.
2. Combined fault current available due to transformer and 100 percent motor contribution
2C 20,048 amperes symmetrical.
Ratings and Settings
Breaker
or Fuse
Long Delay
Short Delay
Instantaneous
Trip
Ground-Current
Trip
Taken From Curve
A
RBA-400
80E Standard Refill Fuse
—
—
Cat. Section AD 36-664-A
B
SCB-1200
1200A
100% Pickup
20-Sec. Delay
180% Pickup
5 Cycle Delay
—
.4 Sec.
See Cat. Section AD H-29-660A
C
I
SCB-600,
600A
100% Pickup
20-Sec. Delay
250% Pickup
3-Cycle Delay
1200% Pickup
.15 Sec.
See Cat. Section AD H-29-660A
♦
D
AB De-ion
100A
Type JA Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker
500%
—
See Cat. Section AD H-29-060A
•
 1
Westinghouse
Application Data H-29-660    Page 13
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
Figure 10: Selective Tripping Time-Current Characteristic Curves for the Low Voltage Transformer Installation
with Primary Fuses
o O       OOOOOo
o       o    oooooo
o O       OOOOOO
o o      OOOOOO
J
OT100 00
 2	
m       *
n    m   P"
£ ~	
o   *- m
-pi 10000
s
 ™   -
o	
.
	
z
1
■   ■
w
L
*
■
h
/<F®i
o	
X
Averaqe Value
,
	
■
N
r.m.s. Fault Currem
at Points Shown
:
\°\
(|
!.:(
b)
II
reak
otal
lead
me
11
JA
B
er
Brea
i _
T
1000
Tota
Clear
\
- -
100 0
\
c
■>g
'if
T
i
ime
\ \
\3k
\ \
\         ilr.
\S      ^k
(a;
SA     >\
«-F
use
lelti
ig Time
■ iv
100
13
" 1
-     -   i
Safe
Zon
stv
«4
e
\
\\
^ _
Shoi
t
■ Curve
M_
\
\
1
Time
1
\
\
?
10
..
\--
	
-   -
V
 ..
\
.
\     i
i
\\
j
i
\\
tn
H
:   i
\
z
o
■■ $
jt
\\
Id
(A
\:\
" ■:
\ N
~x
1.0
3
\
u
1
i_
\
3
\
\
t-
i \
'F?.
\ \
\\
Gr
LTi;
our
P
a i
-urren
Jjj
t
r
"^
b
^***"-»«.
r
_
\
1
v\
T"w
\\
\
\
\
\
\
\
0.0 1
\
>
Jo 01
Scale x 100 = Current in Amperes at 600 Volts
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 14
Systems Circuit Breakers
r>
J 00-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
0 Volts Ac Maximum
Testing
Design tests
Extensive testing has been conducted to insure the performance and design reliability
of all components of Westinghouse Systems
Circuit Breakers. There are two categories of
design tests' standard tests and high-inter-
rupting-capacity tests.
A. Standard tests
1. Calibration of static sensor
All tests are conducted with 2!4-ampere input to the 600-ampere static sensor and
5-ampere input to the 1200, 2000 and 2500
ampere static sensor, representing 100 percent output of the respective current monitor
with which it may be used.
The following table lists the calibration tests
a static sensor must pass.
5. Endurance test
Performance requirements
Function
Set
ing
Test current
Min
Max
(amp)
l?O0
?000
3500
600
Long-delay pickup
X
X
2.5 &6
1.5&3
Long-delay time
X
X
30
15
Short-delay pickup
X
X
5 & 35
2.5 & 17.5
Short-delay time    ■
X
X
30
15
Instantaneous pickup
X
X
5&60
2.5 & 30
Instantaneous trip
X
30
15
Ground pickup
X
25
12.5
Ground time
X
X
20   -
10
2. Short-time rating test
a. Three-phase test at rated short-time current, at rated voltage
b. Current on for 10 cycles (1/6 sec (« 60
Hz), off 15 sec, on 10 cycles (1/6 sec fe
60 Hz)
3. Overload test
a. At 600 percent of rated current at rated
voltage
b. Number of operations
Performance requirements
Breaker
site
(amp)
Number of
operations
Operations
per minute
600
50      "
4
1200
50
r
2000 50 r
'Operations may be conducted in groups of 5 with 15 minutes
maximum between groups.
Qk Temperature rise (in air after overload
est)
50 C maximum temperature rise at terminals
with 100 percent current
Operations
per
minute
Number of operations
Breaker
size
(amp)
with
rated
current
without
rated
current
600
1
1000
5000
1200
1
500
2000
2000/2500
1
500
2000
6. Calibration repeated
7. Short-circuit test
Performance requirements
Breaker
size
(amp)
Single-pofe*
sym
current
(amp)
3-phaset
sym
current
(amp)
600
8.660
10.000
1200
12,120
14,000
2000/2500
14,000
25.000
'Consists of opening operation followed in two minutes by
closing-opening operation.
tOne opening for sizes up to 1200 amperes; and one opening.
followed after two minutes by a closing-opening operation for
sizes above 1200 amperes.
8. Tripout test at 200 percent
9. Dielectric withstand test at 2200
volts
B. High-interrupting-capacity tests
1. Calibration
2. Short circuit at interrupting capacity
a. Opening followed in two minutes by
closing-opening operation
3. 250 percent calibration
4. Dielectric withstand test
Production and reliability tests
Every unit manufactured is subjected to the
following tests:
1. Static sensor
Complete check of minimum and maximum
setting of each adjustment as outlined in the
table under Calibration part A, 1., of the design tests. This makes certain that all parts
of every unit will function properly when
installed.
2. Complete circuit-breaker-frame tests
a. Mechanism operation, latch gaging—to
make sure of proper operation
b. Contact adjustment checks—pressure,
follow-up, toe clearance, contact opening
c. Millivolt drop test—to make sure of meeting temperature limits
d. Dielectric and ground tests
3. Flux-transfer shunt trip
a. Operation,  pickup-voltage,  and  ground
test
4. Electrical operator
a. Operation, manual—handle travel, on, off,
and reset
b. Operation, electrical—at least 25 operations are conducted to make sure that
unit operates and maintains adjustments
and to .be sure that unit can operate the
breake'r even at an operator supply voltage of 75 percent of rated voltage
5. Complete operation tests
a.  Each SCB is given functional tests during
final inspection as a complete unit—with
all components assembled
Reliability is assured through testing of the
mechanical and electrical operation of every
component. Because quality components
and materials are used, Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers maintain their reliability
through long service.
6. Testing of attachments and accessories
a. Shunt trips
(1) Mechanical adjustment and operation
check
(2) Ground test
(3) Electrical test to trip at 75% of rated
voltage
b. Undervoltage release
(1) Mechanical adjustment and operation check
(2) Ground test
(3) Electrical test to seal in at 85 percent
of rated voltage and to trip between
70 percent and 35 percent of rated
voltage
c. Auxiliary switches
(1) Mechanical operation
(2) Low-voltage contact-operation check
Field test procedure
Westinghouse Systems Circuit Breakers can
be easily tested in the field. All 600-frame
current monitors have a 2.5-ampere output
and all 1200, 2000 and 2500-frame current
monitors have a 5-ampere output when the
current in the breaker equals the continuous-
current rating of the breaker, regardless of the
breaker rating. All breakers can be checked
with the same few simple items of equipment
— an ordinary ammeter, voltmeter, single-
pole switch, and stopwatch make up the only
test equipment needed in addition to a source
of alternating current that is variable from
zero to fifty amperes.
To check the accuracy of the setting of each
adjustment dial, connect the test circuit as
shown in figure 11 with power supply connected to static sensor terminals A and N
(these terminals connect to phase A) and
proceed as follows:
D
 o
Westinghouse
Application Data H-29-660    Page 15
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
1. Long-delay tripping
a. Pickup: Slowly increase the current from
zero and take a current reading when the
voltmeter needle jumps to approximately
30 volts. The ratio of this current to 2.5 or
5 amperes should be within 10 percent of
the long-delay pickup-current setting of
the static trip unit. For example, if the
ammeter indicated 3 amperes at the 30-
volt point with a 5-ampere-input sensor,
the indicated ratio would be 3/5 or 0.60.
If the actual setting were 0.65, the test
figure would be within the limits of accuracy; that is, 0.65 ±10 percent is a
range of 0.59 to 0.72, and the test figure
of 0.60 falls within the range.
b. Trip time: Adjust current to 30 amperes,
for a 5-ampere sensor, then open the
switch. Close the switch and start timing
with the stopwatch. Breaker should trip
within 20 percent of time trip setting.
(Note: if the short-delay and/or instantaneous pickup is less than 6X, raise the
short-delay and/or instantaneous trip settings above 6*, or check long-delay trip
time at current less than short-delay or
instantaneous pickup settings. Refer to
proper characteristic curve to determine
the trip time at currents less than 6x.
2. Short-delay tripping
,a. Pickup: Increase the current and note
the current reading at which the breaker
trips. Current must be increased fast
enough to prevent tripping by long-time
delay circuits. Leave the power-supply
control at this setting for reference in testing the short-delay time.
b. Short-delay time: After performing the
short-delay-pickup test, open the switch.
Now advance the power-supply-current
control above the setting that tripped the
breaker in the pickup-current test. Close
the switch. Breaker should trip almost
instantaneously; i.e., from 2 to 10 cycles
(0.03 to 0.16 sec). Elaborate methods and
equipment would be necessary to determine short-delay-trip time accurately. For
field testing, it is sufficient to observe
whether the breaker trips in less than
one second.
3. Instantaneous trip
Because the instantaneous-trip time is not,
adjustable, it is necessary to check only the
pickup setting. Follow the same procedure
as in the short-delay-pickup test. If the sensor
has a short-delay trip it must be made ineffective by connecting test point TP2 of the
sensor to terminal D1.
To void the discriminator circuit, connect,
TP3 to D1. To void the instantaneous
operation, connect D2 to D1.
The tests as described check phase A of the
sensor and all other components of the Systems Circuit Breaker. To check the other two
phases, B and C, it is necessary to conduct
just one of any of the preceding tests to make
sure that tripping elements are working because only one sensing and triggering circuit
is used for all phases and it is common to
all poles.
4. Ground-current tripping
Ground-current tripping can be checked by
passing a current greater than 0.5 ampere
for the 600-ampere sensors and 1.0 ampere
for the 1200, 2000 and 2500-ampere
sensors through terminals N and G. Here
again, it is sufficient to note whether the
breaker trips in less than one second.
These tests check all components of the
Systems Circuit Breaker except the current
monitors. It is hardly possible that these can
become defective unless they are physically
damaged. A simple continuity check would
determine this condition.
To test the complete system including current
monitors, a testing stand must be used. The
testing stand must be capable of producing
currents equal to the full rating and overload
currents of the system. The three-phase-bus
current monitors are mounted on the circuit-
breaker assembly and can be checked at a
testing stand. But the ground current monitor
of a four-wire system cannot be checked
without removing it from the fixed buswork
in the switchboard.
5. Field Test Procedure when
G.F.I, is used.
Connect the Dc voltmeter between TP1
and TP2. See fig. 12otherwise connections
and testing are as above.
Testing of the G.T.I, is accomplished by
putting 1.5 amp between G and N. The
indicator should come on. Remove the
current and the indicator should stay on.
Throw the reset switch and the indicator
should go out.
<3Z
120
VAC
RESET I■
SW«     "
°  * STATIC
o  b SENSOR
o  C
o 6
O   N
o 01
-o   TPI
-O   TPZ
INDICATOR *
'INDICATOR- 120 V    7W,     RESET    SWITCH. 0-5 AMP   lEOV •***      (MOMENTARY   CONTACT)
RESET    SWITCH   AND    iNOCATOft    ARE    SUPPLIED     BT    USER
GROUND    FAULT   INDICATOR   WIRING
Fig. 12
Single-pole
y switch
Figure 11 : Test Circuit
 Application Data H-29-660    Page 16
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum      ,
f
Application Tables
Tables A through E are selection guides for
SCB applications in selective tripping and
fully rated systems.
The tabulated values in tables C through F
are based on the assumption that the SCB
is mounted in a distribution switchboard
located next to the supply transformer, and
therefore, the impedance of the bus connecting the transformer to the switchboard main
bus is negligible. For sizing breakers that
are remote from the distribution switchboard, the cable and/or bus duct impedance should be considered. The complete
formula method is illustrated in Section D
of Bulletin B8674.
Breaker type designations shown for group
feeder and feeder breakers are minimum
sizes for adequate interrupting current
ratings. Other types may be used to meet
continuous current-requirements if adequate
interrupting requirements and voltage are
satisfied.
For more detailed application information,
refer to appropriate codes and standards.
Table A: Standard Ratings of the Systems Circuit Breaker
Breaker
Maximum
Current Monitor
Interrupting Rating, Current
Designation
Frame Size,
Ratings, Amperes
Measured at Instant % Cycle
Continuous
After Fault, Amperes
Amperes
Asymmetrical     Summetrical
240 Volts Ac
SCB-600
SCB-1200
SCB-2000
SCB-2500
480 Volts Ac
SCB-600
SCB-1200
SCB-2000
SCB-2500
600 Volts Ac
SCB-600
SCB-1200
SCB-2000
SCB-2500
600
1200
2000
2500
600
1200
2000
2500
600
1200
2000
2500
100, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500 and 600
100, 225, 250, 300, 350. 400, 500, 600,
700, 800, 900, 1000, 1 200
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800,
900,1000,1200, 1400, 1600, 1800 and 2000
2000, 2200, 2400 and 2500
100, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500 and 600
100, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600,
700,800,900,1000,1200
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800,
900, 1000, 1 200, 1400, 1600, 1800 and 2000
2000, 2200, 2400 and 2500
100, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500 and 600
100, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600,
700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800,
900. 1000, 1200,1400, 1600,1800 and 2000
2000, 2200, 2400 and 2500
50,000
50,000
150,000
150,000
42,000
42,000
125,000
125,000
35,000
30,000
35,000
30,000
100,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
25,000
22,000
25,000
22,000
75,000
75,000
65,000
65,000
Table B: Trip Current Ratings of Systems Circuit Breakers
Current
Long-time Pick-up
Instantaneous Pick-up
Short-time Delay Pick
Ground Current
Monitor
Range, Amperes©®
Range, Amperes
up Range, Amperes®
Trip Amperes®
Ratings®
Min.®
Max.®
Min.®
Max.©
Min.®
Max.®
Min.®
100
50
120
100
1200
100
700
20
200
100
240
200
2400
200
1400
40
225
1125
270
225
2700
225
1325
45
250
125
300
250
3000
250
1750
50
300
150
360
300
3600
300
2100
60
350
175
420
350
4200
350
2450
70
400
200
480
400
4800
400
2800
80
500
250
600
500
600
500
3500
100
600
300
720
600
7200
600
4200
120
700
350
840
700
8400
700
4900
140
800
400
960
800
9600
800
5600
160
900
450
1080
900
10800
900
6300
180
1000
500
1200
1000
12000
1000
7000
200
1200
600
1440
1200
14400
1200
8400
240
1400
700
1680
1400
16800
1400
9800
280
1600
800
1920
1600
19200
1600
11200
320
1800
900
2160
1800
21600
1800
12600
360
2000
1000
2400
2000
24000
2000
14000
400
2400
1200
2880
2400
28800
2400
16800
480
2500
1250
3000
2500
30000
2500
17500
500
Fl
SCB-1200 and SCB-2000 breakers specifying short
time delay and no instantaneous pick-up will be
supplied with a fixed type instantaneous trip device
in Eieu of the adjustable type. This fixed instantaneous
circuit is set to override the short time delay when the
current value reaches approximately 21 times the
current monitor rating causing the breaker to trip
instantaneously. This feature allows short time rated
breakers (SCB-1200 and SCB-2000) to be applied
on systems having short circuit capabilities up to their
interrupting ratings. Selectivity will be lost at 22,000
amp r.m.s. symmetrical on the SCB 1200 and at
42,000 amp r.m.s. symmetrical on the SCB-2000.
SCB-600 and SCB-2500 breakers specifying short
time delay must specify an instantaneous pick-up
trip which has a maximum pick-up value of 12 times
the current monitor rating. Fault currents in excess of
this value will trip the breakers instantaneously.
D
Long-time delay adjustable from 2 to 20 sec. at 600% rating.
0 Short-time delay adjustable from 2 to 10 cycles.
:£> Ground current trip time adjustable from 0.1 (6 cycles) to 0.5 (30 cycles) sec.
® Refer ratings table, page 1, to determine which monitors apply to each SCB frame rating.
® Do not exceed setting which results in continuous current rating in excess of frame rating ; see ratings table. A
© All adjustments are continuous from minimum to maximum.
o
 Application Data H-29-660 Page 21
%
Westinghouse
Systems Circuit Breakers
100-2500 Amperes, 3 Poles Only
600 Volts Ac Maximum
Wiring Diagrams
Showing Typical SCB Applications
c?
LINE    SIDE
r^fl      ^B        <j)C
.i
. G
Zl
5p
,, POLARITY
5^?^    MARK
ATTACH
1   rM,
I I      I0PER      i
i        I   i ;
I J    L 1
(PT)
»-I    I
i f n
.J
02-
 B -Ox-}
LOAD    SIDE
A IBilC   I G I N l6llO2l0l|D2|TPI|TFg
SCB     STATIC      SENSOR
(WITH     G.T      CIRCUIT)
3 Wire 30 with G.F. Protection
LINE   SIDE
0A        0B jtZ
-A-O-x
— 3
o-xfn
^-3
MENT MOTOR
;      ,  ,oper. ;
I I
I	
©
NEUTRAL
1-0*0-1
-l_ -ll-
Nfr—
3-O-x-T
B-O-x
•6-
■6
LOAD   SIDE
A | B I C I G | N | 01 |02| 011 D2|TPl|TP2
SCB    STATIC     SENSOR
(WITH    G.T.    CIRCUIT)
4 Wire 30 with G.F. Protection
For Fourth Current Monitor on Neutral Only
LINE
(fl&          <f>t
I
; c
SIDE
»          *
i            i
i
:
_^_.
3
J*
*T
_*-*
-
lATTACul     r- - -i      1    X"   1
IMENT    |      1 gOJOR   ,       ,   sgv   ,
1                1      1                   1       | VST/  |
1 J     1 '      L__J
*CJ
-B-o-x-5
LOAD   SIDE
A I B |C I G |N 101 102101 |D2|TPI|TP2
SCB    STATIC     SENSOR
4 Wire 30 without G.F. Protection
3 Wire 30 without G.F. Protection
LINE    SIDE
r/JA
I,
•N -/"^ —
08
n
hi i«ur       | j
Imp-nt   '     'motor
lMENT    I       I OPER.
Ill
I I      I -i
B-ox
D-t>-X- ^
N °-v-^
N —I
t
LOAD    SIDE
X
A IB I C I G I N |0I |Q2|DI|D2|TPI|TP2
SCB    STATIC     SENSOR
( WITH      G.T.    CIRCUIT)
4 Wire 30 with G.F. Protection
For Fourth Current Monitor on Ground Only
(For other wiring diagrams, request dwg. #5683D29)
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 1
Westinghouse
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac. 250 Volts Dc Maximum
Application
Westinghouse molded case breakers are designed for circuit protection of low voltage
distribution systems. They are suitable for
application as main breakers and for protection of branch and feeder circuits and
connected apparatus. These breakers provide
overload protection for conductors and
short-circuit protection for all circuit elements such as conductors, motors and
starters.
They are designed for use in switchboards,
control centers, panelboards, combination
starters, bus duct plug-in units and separate
individual enclosures. In these various enclosures, they are applicable to the requirements of lighting, distribution and other
power circuits.
Standard current ratings of AB De-ion
circuit breakers correspond in general to the
C.E.C. ratings of conductor carrying capacities. These breakers are primarily designed
for the protection of conductors, both
aluminum and copper.
User Benefits
Accurate Reliable Protection : The overload element in each pole of every breaker
is individually calibrated and tested in a
controlled temperature to meet C.S.A.
requirements. Especially hardened, ground
and polished trip latches assure continuous
and accurate tripping characteristics.
De-ion Arc Quenching: Westinghouse-
developed De-ion arc quenchers positively
extinguish dangerous arcs in a fraction of a
second. Coupled with a positive action
quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism,
they assure long circuit breaker life with
minimal burning and pitting of contact surfaces.
Reduced Downtime and Maintenance
Costs: Circuit breakers are long-lived devices designed for maintenance-free, repetitive duty without costly shutdowns. Because the breaker is resettable, downtime
amounts to only a matter of seconds after
the overload or fault has been corrected.
Reduced Operation Cost: Welded internal
parts, high contact pressure, and silver alloy
butt-type contacts used in circuit breakers
offer considerably less resistance to electrical current than do the fuse clips, bolted
joints and hinge joints of a fusible device.
Thus, with a lower watts loss, electrical
power cost savings result.
Single-Phase Protection: A fault or overload on any one phase opens all poles of
the breaker, minimizing the possibility of
single?-phasing polyphase motors.
Dual Protective Elements: Bi-metallic
thermal elements protect on overloads
where inverse time tripping is desirable;
magnetic trip elements operate the breaker
instantly on dangerous fault currents. Trip-
free, the breaker cannot be held closed
under fault conditions.
Maximum Safety: Molded case circuit
breakers are dead front and personnel are
not exposed to "live" parts. Line terminal
shields are available for additional protection when required.
Tamperproof: The complete breaker or
trip unit is sealed at the factory to prevent
tampering and alteration of its rating.
June, 1970
New Information
Supersedes DBH-29-000 dated December, 1963
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 2
Westinghouse
Thermal Magnetic Breakers
Ambient Compensating Breakers Magnetic-Only Circuit Interrupters
Thermal magnetic breakers are general purpose devices suitable for the majority of
breaker applications and are considered the
industry standard. Combining thermal and
magnetic trip elements, they provide accurate overload and short circuit protection
for conductors and connected apparatus.
Because their continuous current rating
changes with ambient temperature variations, these breakers are best suited for conductor overload protection.
Thermal magnetic breakers have all the design features of standard breakers shown
on pages 4-5.
Ambient compensating breakers automatically compensate for variations in ambient
temperature, and thus minimize the need
for de-rating in higher ambients, and up-
rating in lower ambients. This provides a
near constant current rating over a wide
range of temperatures
Ambient compensating breakers are calibrated at 25°C. However, because of the
built-in compensator, they will carry approximately the same current at other ambients
with a very small ampere rating change. The
trip units are thermally compensated to
carry rated load at 50°C while still meeting
C.S.A. tripping requirements for 25°C
breakers at 25°C. These breakers do require
slight derating at ambients above 50°C.
Ambient compensating breakers are thermal
magnetic and provide overload and short
circuit protection. They have all the design
features of standard breakers shown on
pages 4-5.
Magnetic-only circuit interrupters are similar
to standard thermal magnetic breakers
except that they do not have thermal trip
elements. They are equipped with front-
adjustable magnetic trip elements and are
used where only short circuit protection is
required. Because the adjustment feature
allows closer short circuit protection, these
breakers are commonly preferred for motor
and resistance welder circuits.
Each interrupter is calibrated at the factory
for a specific trip range and set on the high
side. Adjustment knobs located in the front
cover can be adjusted to a specific requirement within the specified range. The
adjustment knobs, made of nylon, have a
high, a low and a series of intermediate
setting positions. The magnetic trip is so
designed that each point follows a linear
scale and each of the intermediate settings
has a significant value, within calibration
tolerances.
Magnetic-only circuit interrupters have all
the features of standard breakers shown on
pages 4-5, except that they do not have a
thermal trip element.
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 3
(
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc Maximum
Vis ABreakers
MARK 75® Breakers
TRI-PAC® Breakers
^af*^8#
^%*    Fi
0Fr- Jf
.■:■■■ ■' ''r:FFFF:FF/FF:FF'r:
2:22V,V2v;:- U:.-; 2.:,'2
^
: i.':; ■ ■
FFFF
iil;ilt.2j
IIII
■■■■■JU   :
MM                 fc
Ills.1:2.
Iiii
^■e
llll
■■■■-FxMiM
; >   -  2
'}'F.:':-i   ''"'"■:■; ^:F.FFFFFF
<m *8T   1 /■::■;    mm
Vis ABreakers are similar to standard molded
case breakers except that they are equipped
with a window of transparent, heat resistant
thermoplastic over the breaker contacts.
This permits instant, visual verification of
whether the contacts are open or closed.
These breakers fulfill the needs of industiial
plants where safety codes require visible
contacts as an additional safety precaution
for maintenance personnel. They can be
supplied with thermal magnetic, magnetic-
only or ambient compensated trip elements
to cover a wide scope of applications. They
are not available in MARK 75 or TRI-PAC
breakers.
Vis ABreakers have all the design features of
standard breakers shown on pages 4-5.
MARK 75 breakers are similar to and are the
same size as standard thermal magnetic
breakers, except that they are designed to
provide up to 75,000 amperes asymmetrical
interrupting capacity at 240 volts Ac Thus,
MARK 75 breakers are ideally suited for use
in network systems and other applications
where unusually high fault currents exist.
Standard MARK 75 breakers are equipped
with thermal magnetic trip elements; they
are also available as magnetic-only or
ambient compensating breakers.
MARK 75 breakers have all the standard
design features shown on pages 4-5, except
that the special molded case is gray, instead
of black and has greater strength and resistance to tracking.
TRI-PAC circuit breakers offer an even
higher interrupting capacity than MARK 75
breakers. They are similar to standard thermal
magnetic breakers except that they incorporate a current limiting device. This enables
them to be used in secondary distribution
systems where fault currents up to 200,000
symmetrical rms, amperes are available.
Thus, they are a triple package of protection
-(1) time delay thermal trip for overload
protection, (2) instantaneous magnetic trip
for normal fault current protection, and (3)
current limiting action for higher fault current protection - combined and coordinated
in a single compact and economical device.
Because they limit current, TRI-PAC breakers can be used to protect smaller AB breakers and other connected apparatus, in addition to protecting feeder and branch circuits.
TRI-PAC breakers incorporate all the design
features of standard breakers as shown on
pages 4-5, in addition to the current limiter
package shown on pages 6-7.
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 4
Westinghouse
i
<
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 5
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
i
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc Maximum
Design Features
of Standard Breakers
^P    Molded Cases
Moldarta® and/or glass polyester cases
combine built-in ruggedness and high dielectric strength in a compact design that
is both space-saving and attractive. Mechanism is entirely enclosed, providing maximum safety.
^3   Free Bearing Surfaces
Bearing surfaces are of dissimilar metals.
This prevents sticking and bearing wear,
allowing long service life.
^y   Handle Position Indication
Position of handle gives positive indication
of whether circuit is "On", "Off" or Tripped.
ON : Handle in this
position indicatesthat
the circuit is closed
or "On".
TRIPPED:Whenthe
breaker trips automatically due to overload or short circuit,
the handle moves to
a position midway
between the manual
"On" and "Off".
OFF: Handle is in
this position when
circuit is open or
"off". To restore service after automatic
tripping, handle is
first moved from
center to "Off" and
then to "On".
Accurate Protection
All tripping members have ground and polished latch surfaces and are heat-treated to
prevent distortion. Heat-treated bi-metals
retain calibration permanently.
o
^y   Factory Sealed
Smaller breakers are sealed to prevent tampering and changing of calibration. In the
larger frames, the trip units are individually
sealed and are interchangeable by removing
the breaker cover.
Firm Connectors
Pressure-type connectors are standard with
all ratings above 30 amperes and make efficient, dependable connections. Terminals
suitable for copper cable are supplied as
standard. Terminals suitable for either aluminum or copper cables can be specified
for most breakers.
De-ion Arc Quenchers
o
Silver Alloy Contacts on all
Breakers
This Westinghouse development consists
of a series of grid plates mounted in parallel
between supports of insulating material.
The slots in the steel plates extend directly
over the contacts and draw the arc from
the moving contact up into the divided
chamber. The arc is thus confined, divided,
and extinguished in less than V* cycle.
For increased contact life and enduring low
resistance; special alloys prevent sticking
and welding.
%0  Electrically Welded Connections
Firm, strong welded connections assure
long life. Provide low resistance and low
watts loss, with increased economy in
operation.
^
Quick-Make, Quick-Break
Mechanism
The quick-make, quick-break over center
toggle mechanism provides quick, positive
action in opening and closing circuits. It
prevents "teasing" the contacts.
fcH Common Trip
Multi-pole units have insulated common-
trip bar that opens all poles when an overload occurs in any one phase. Minimizes
possibility of single phasing.
Complete Interpole Barriers
(Not illustrated)
Completely isolate one pole from another,
eliminate possibility of phase-to-phase
flashover.
<
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 6
Westinghouse
<
Design Features of TRI-PAC® Breakers
©Retain All Features of Standard
AB De-ion Circuit Breakers
TRI-PAC breakers are built to the same
exacting design standards and by the same
methods as conventional Westinghouse
molded case circuit breakers. They retain
all the features of standard breakers including: De-ion arc quenchers, non-welding
silver alloy contacts, common trip and
Moldarta® and/or glass polyester cases.
©Compact, Easy-to-Remove
Current Limiter Housing
Current limiters are contained within the
molded case of the breaker, and are readily
accessible from the front when replacement
is necessary. On small units the limiters are
contained in a removable housing and plug
into the breaker as a unit. On larger units
the limiters bolt individually to the breaker
frame and are enclosed by a separate limiter
housing or by the breaker cover.
Iff Limiter Housing Safety Interlock
When the limiter housing is removed, a safety interlock trips the breaker. This interlock
also prevents closing of the breaker while
the limiter housing is removed so that it is
impossible to come in contact with "live"
parts.
%0 Positive Trip Indication
When a breaker trips, the handle always
moves to the center "trip" position. In addition, the cause of tripping is indicated in
the following ways:
• If the breaker cannot be reset immediately
after tripping but can be reset after a
short period, it indicates thermal tripping
due to an overload or high resistance
fault.
• If it can be reset immediately, a "normal"
fault current has been interrupted by instantaneous magnetic action.
•If the TRI-PAC cannot be reset, high
fault interruption by the current limiter
has taken place.
©Coordinated Common Trip to
Prevent Single Phasing
(
When a current limiter operates, the ejected
plunger causes instant release of a common
tripping bar. All poles are opened simultaneously, eliminating the possibility of single
phasing.
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 7
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
<
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc Maximum
Specially Designed
Current Limiters
When a high fault current causes one or
more limiters to function, a spring-loaded
plunger is instantly ejected from the end of
the limiter. The plunger strikes a trip bar
which causes the breaker contacts to open
the instant the fault occurs.
An extended plunger on any limiter indicates,
at a glance, on which phase the fault has
occurred so that testing of limiters is unnecessary. Presence of an extended plunger
also prevents relatching of the breaker.
Thus, "good" limiters must be used or the
breaker cannot be operated. These limiters
are not affected by the overloads or normal
short circuits cleared by the thermal-mag-
nectic action of the breaker, and unless they
have cleared a high fault current, as evidenced by an extended plunger, they may
be used without question.
Since these limiters are designed for use
only with TRI-PAC breakers, safe, proper
coordination is assured.
mm   Missing Limiter Interlock
TRI-PAC breakers with a separate limiter
housing are provided with a missing limiter
interlock which prevents the breaker being
reset unless all limiters are in place. Thus,
accidental single phasing is prevented since
the breaker cannot be reclosed when a
limiter is missing.
Choice of Three Terminal Connections
TRI-PAC breakers are available with front
connected pressure type terminals, bolted
rear-connected mounting studs and plug-
in terminal mounting blocks.
Accessories
TRI-PAC breakers accommodate many
standard AB breaker accessories including
shunt trip, undervoltage trip and auxiliary
contacts. Application of other accessories
should be reviewed with Westinghouse.
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 8
Westinghouse
<
Accessories for All Type
Breakers
AB De-ion circuit breakers are, for the most
part, used in conjunction with, or built into,
otherequipmentsuch as panelboards, switchboards and numerous types of enclosures.
Accessories shown on this and the following pages are available for most breakers.
Quicklag "C" Faceplate
For front panel mounting. Faceplate snaps
over the front of the single-pole breaker, is
a two-piece wraparound on the two-pole
breaker.
Quicklag "C" Clamp
For base mounting of Quicklag breakers on
panels. Two needed per breaker.
Quicklag "C" Base Mounting Plate
Plates accommodate six single-pole, three
two-pole or two three-pole breakers. Can
be cut for specific need.
Handle Locks
Various handle locks are available to prevent
either accidental or deliberate operation of
circuit breakers. The "trip free" handle of
the AB De-ion circuit breaker enables it to
trip on overload or short circuit conditions,
even though handle locks are in place.
For Quicklag Breakers
Refer to Price List
H-29-020 for application to specific
breakers.
Lockdog
Non-padlocking type,
removable.
Padlock Attachment
Can be padlocked, is
removable.
Padlock Device
For 1 -pole Quicklags.
Padlockable, non-removable.
Padlock Device
For 2 and 3 - pole I
breakers. Padlockable, |
non-removable.
For Standard Breakers
Padlockable   or   non-
padlocking.
Handle Tie for
Quicklag Breakers
For use with two single
pole breakers. Provides
common manual operation with individual
pole tripping and trip
indications.
Terminal Shields
Westinghouse offers a
complete line of formed terminal shields
which fasten over the
line ends of AB
breakers to protect
personnel against accidental contact with the
incoming wiring. Meet
most exacting safety
requirements; e.g. for
machine tool control
panels where overload relays are internally
reset. Availability: All breakers except
Quicklags, BA, CA and PB.
Rear Connecting
Studs
For adapting breakers   K
for   switchboard   and
other   rear   connected
applications. Studs can
be used with standard
breakers   without  any
modification   and   are
available for mounting
breakers  on   insulated
or steel panels.  Refer
to   PL   H-29-020   for
specific applications.
Availability:   All
breakers  except   ( ;; JJ
Quicklags, BA
and CA.
(
•..
(
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 9
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
.
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc Maximum
Plug-in Kits
For rear connected applications such as
switchboards. Designed to provide quick
and easy plug-in installation, and fast
removal of breaker. Includes male studs, or
flat stub connectors for attachment to line
and/or load end of breaker, plug-in mounting block with tulip receptacles, rear studs,
and mounting hardware. Available for all
breakers except Quicklags, BA, CA and PB.
Motor Operators
Side Mounted Type
for EB, EHB, FB, HFB,
FB Tri-Pac, DA, JA, KA,
and HKA Breakers
Top Mounted
Type — for type
LAB and larger
breakers
Motor operators provide complete remote
control of a circuit breaker by means of a
pushbutton or similar pilot device. Positive
"on" or "off" switching is accomplished by
use of a motor driven operating arm
engaging the breaker's handle. The motor
is energized momentarily to actuate the
lever arm, moving it to either "on" or "off".
The control is broken by means of an
internal cut off switch. Means for manual
operation — in the event of power failure or
emergency situation — is also provided.
Motor operators are available for 120 Vac
(on LAB and larger units — also good for
125 Vac), 208 Vac, 240 Vac, and 480 Vac.
The 480 Vac operators utilize a 120 Vac
motor in conjunction with a 480/240 to
120 dual voltage transformer. On LAB and
larger operators, the transformer is supplied
for separate, customer mounting.
Motor Data
Type
Motor
Inrush Current,
Breaker
Amperes (Peak)
Type
Hp.
120    208
Volts Volts
240
Volts
EB, EHB, FB,
HFB, TRI-
PAC FB
Split Phase
1/75
10         4
5
DA, JA, KA
Split Phase
1/50
2         6
1
LAB, LA,
HLA
Reversing
8         5
4
MA, HMA,
NB, HNB
Reversing
11          7
6
PB
Reversing
20       12
11
Motor operators are intended for infrequent
operation, in line with CSA endurance
standards for moulded case circuit breakers.
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 10
Westinghouse
<
Modifications
Internally Mounted Modifications
For severe or unusual operating conditions, for special functions or control sequences,
Westinghouse breakers can be custom-built or modified with special attachments. Beyond
the basic function of overcurrent and short circuit protection, such special breakers meet
modern, complex circuit requirements, and add flexibility of operation and efficiency. Those
modifications which can be mounted inside the breaker are shown on these two pages. Only
two internally mounted modifications — shunt trip, under-voltage release, auxiliary switch,
alarm switch — may be mounted in DA, JA thru PB, HKA thru HNB and thermal magnetic
EB, EHB, FB and HFB breakers. Only one of these modifications may be mounted in FB and
HFB magnetic only, 2 pole EB, EHB, FB and all TRI-PAC breakers.
Undervoltage Trip
Space Available
for Internally
Mounted
Accessories
Space Available
for Internally
Mounted
Accessories
Availability:
Frame.
DA    thru    TRI-PAC®    PB
Undervoltage release must be factory installed on all breakers. For undervoltage
protection. A solenoid device mounts within
breaker case. Coil must be energized before
closing breaker. Trips breaker when voltage
drops below 40 to 60% of coil rating. For
line voltages up to 250 volts Dc or 600
volts Ac. Externally mounted resistors and/or
rectifier units are supplied for certain ratings.
Standard leads extend 1 8" out the side of
breaker. Longer leads may be specified.
Breaker Frame
Pole Mounting
EB, EHB, FB, HFB®
Right, Specify
for Left
FB TRI-PAC®
Left pole only
DA, J A, KA, HKA®
Left pole only
LAB, LA, HLA, LA
TRI-PAC®
Right, Specify
for Left
MA, HMA®
Right, Specify
for Left
NB, HNB, NB
TRI-PAC®
Right, Specify
for Left
PB, PB TRI-PAC®
Right, Specify
for Left
(
©Rectifier Unit — for separate customer
mounting — is supplied for all Ac voltages.
©External resistor — for separate customer
mounting — is supplied for voltages above
240 Vac and 24 Vdc.
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 11
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc Maximum
Shunt Trip
Availability: CA thru TRI-PAC PB Frame.
For tripping breaker from a remote point. A
solenoid device mounts within breaker case.
Breaker trips when coil is energized. Shunt
trips must be factory installed on all
breakers. A cut-off switch breaks the
circuit to the momentary rated coil when
breaker opens (except CA). Available for
control voltages up to 250 volts Dc or
600 volts Ac. Voltage and frequency must
be specified. Standard leads extend 18" out
the side of breaker. Longer leads may be
specified.
Breaker
Normal
Cut-off
Frame
PoleMtg.
Switch
CA
Right, Specify
for Left
No
EB, EHB, FB,
Right, Specify
HFB
for Left
Yes
DA, JA, KA,
LAB, LA,
HKA, HLA,
TRI-PAC LA
Right only
Yes
MA, NB, HMA,
NHB,
Right, Specify
TRI-PAC NB
for Left
Yes
TRI-PAC FB
Left only
Yes
PB, TRI-PAC
PB
Right only
Yes
Alarm Switch
Availability: DA thru HNB, TRI-PAC NB,
TRI-PAC PB Frames.
For light or alarm indication when breaker
trips. Does not function with manual
operation. Automatically resets when breaker
is relatched. Standard leads extend 18" out
the side of breaker. Longer leads may be
specified. Not field mountable.
Breaker Normal,
Latched Position
Contacts Open
Wire Leads
Breaker Tripped,
Contacts Closed
Breaker
Normal
Contact
Frame
Pole
Operation
Mtg.
(Specify Type
Desired)
DA
Left
Make or Break
EB, EHB, FB,
HFB®
Center
Make when
Breaker Trips
JA, KA, LAB,
LA, MA, NB,
HKA, HLA,
HMA, HNB,
TRI-PAC LA,
TRI-PAC NB
Left
Make or Break
PB, TRI-PAC
PB
Left
Make or Break
®Not available for magnetic circuit
interrupters.
Auxiliary Switch
Availability: CA thru TRI-PAC PB Frame.
No. and Type
of Contacts
Normal
Pole Mtg.
Field mountable on all interchangeable trip
type breakers. For auxiliary control circuits.
Miniature switches mount within breaker.
Commonly used for remote indication of
open or closed breaker and electrically interlocking component control circuits. "A"
contacts are closed when breaker is closed.
"B" contacts are open when breaker is
closed. Contacts are rated 10 amps, 120
volts Ac. Standard leads extend 18" out the
side of breaker. Longer leads may be
specified.
For  CA  Breakers  ("A" and  "B"  Contacts
have common electrical connections.)
2, 1 A and 1 B Right, Specify for Left
For DA, J A, KA, MA, NB, HKA, HMA, HNB,
TRI-PAC NB Breakers ("A" and "B" Contacts have common electrical connections.)
2, 1 A and 1 B Left, Specify for Right
4, 2A's and 2B's       Left, Specify for Right
For EB, EHB, FB, HFB Breakers ("A" and
"B"    Contacts    have    common    electrical
connections.)
2, 1 A and 1 B Right, Specify for Left
4, 2A's and 2B's       Right, Specify for Left
For TRI-PAC  FB   Breakers  ("A" and  "B"
Contacts   have   common    electrical    connections.)
2, 1 A and 1 B Left only
4, 2A's and 2B's       Left only
For LAB, LA, HLA, TRI-PAC LA Breakers
("A" and "B" Contacts are isolated.)
2, 1 A and 1 B Left, Specify for Right
2, 2A's or 2B's Left, Specify for Right
3, Combination of
Left, Specify for Right
A's and B's
4, Combination of
A's and B's®
For  PB, TRI-PAC
Left, Specify for Right
PB  Breakers  ("A" and
"B" Contacts are isolated.)
2, 1Aand 1B
2, 2A's or 2B's
3, Combination of
A's and B's
4, Combination of
A's and B's
Left, Specify for Right
Left, Specify for Right
Left, Specify for Right
Left, Specify for Right
©Not available for LA TRI-PAC
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 12
Westinghouse
<
Modifications, Continued
Mechanical Interlocks
Mechanical interlocks provide a means to     Sliding Bar Type
interlock two breakers so that only one may     Availability: DA thru Tri-Pac NB.
be closed, yet both may be open at any
given time.
Walking Beam Type
Availability: DA thru Tri-Pac PB
Key Interlock
Availability: DAthru HNB, and Tri-Pac PB.
Walking beam interlocks mount on customer's panel at the rear of breakers. When
one breaker is closed, a non-conductive
plunger extends into the opposite breaker
to prevent it from closing. The closed breaker
must open before the open breaker may be
closed. Circuit breakers require special
machining to fit walking beam interlock and
should be ordered from the factory with the
necessary interlock. Standard centre-to-
centre mounting distance is width of one
breaker, plus %".
Sliding bar interlocks mount on customer's
panel in front of breakers. When bar is extended toward one breaker blocking handle
in open position, opposite breaker can be
closed. Closed breaker must be opened and
handle blocked with sliding bar before
opposite breaker can be closed. Breakers do
not require alteration for use with this
attachment. Standard breaker spacing: DA,
JA, KA, HKA — 5%" centre-to-centre; EB
EHB, FB, HFB, Tri-Pac FB — 43/ie"; LAB
LA, MA, NB, HLA, HMA, HNB, Tri-Pac LA
and Tri-Pac NB — 81/2".
Key interlocks mount directly to breaker
cover. Plunger is extended by turning key
in cylinder, thereby locking breaker in open
position. Various keying arrangements can
be supplied, (e. g.-key removable only
when plunger extended; key removable
when plunger either extended or retracted;
multi-cylinder operation of plunger).
A pair of breakers, remote from each other,
can be interlocked so that only one can be
closed at onetime by using key interlocks
operable by the same key and key removable only when plunger is extended. These
interlocks cannot be field-mounted,
<
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 13
■
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc Maximum
(
Ground Current Limiter
Availability: DA, JA, KA,
HKA, HLA, HMA
LAB, LA, MA,
Instantaneous magnetic type. For mining
applications. Trips breaker when ground
currents become excessive. Standard leads
extend 18" out the side of breaker; longer
leads or leads out rear of base may be
specified. Normally supplied for Dc systems.
Can be supplied for Ac but application
should be reviewed with Westinghouse.
Breaker
Frame
DA, JA, KA, LAB,
LA, HLA, HKA
MA, HMA
Amp.
Ratings
Available
3,5,10,20
5. 10, 20, 50
Normal
Pole
Mtg.
Left
Left
Breakers with Paralleled Poles
Breaker poles are paralleled for high current
single-pole operation by the addition of
straps at line and load ends of breaker, as
well as internal strap ahead of the trip to
assure an equal division of the load. For
example, a 2-pole breaker rated 100 amperes would have a single-pole rating of 200
amperes with paralleling straps. Parallel
connections are made at factory. Application
of parallel poles should be reviewed with
Westinghouse.
Fungus-Moisture Treatment and Corrosion Resisting.
Breakers may be made to resist extreme
moisture and fungus conditions in tropical
and other humid localities. Breakers are
coated with a varnish; in addition, fibre
parts are impregnated and varnished to prevent moisture absorption.
For chemical or heavy salt-laden atmospheres, where corrosion is accelerated,
special platings and materials are available.
When ordering, these conditions should be
specifically outlined to assure best protection.
Field Discharge Breakers
Availability: FB, KA and LA.
Field discharge breakers are composed of
3-pole frames having two outside non-automatic poles and a center pole field discharge contact arranged to close as the
outside contacts are opened and vice versa.
Thus, the center pole is used as a field discharge contact. Automatic tripping can be
supplied in outside poles if desired.
LBF Current Limiter Attachment
The LBF current limiter attachment is for
bolting (by customer) to the load end of a
standard 3 pole FB thermal-magnetic
breaker, or Vis ABreaker, to provide 1 00,000
ampere interrupting capacity at up to 600
Vac. LBF current limiters must be applied
as shown in the table below:
FB Breaker
LBF Limiter
Ampere Rating
Catalog Number
15-40
LBF 3040
50-70
LBF 3070
90-100
LBF 3100
125-150
LBF 31 50
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 14
Westinghouse
i
Protective Actions
Thermal Action
Trip Bar
Latch
Line
Bi-metal Element
Magnetic Action
Magnetic Element
Bi-metal Element
Magnetic Element
Line
t£
-Trip Bar
■ Latch
Line
Line
Trip Bar
Contacts
/Broken
V* ra*^3 Line
Contacts
Latch
Thermal Magnetic Action
Magnetic Element
Line \}
Bi-metal Magnetic
Element /Element
Trip
-Bar
Line
Contacts
y Broken
Bi-metel Element
Latch
Thermal (Ambient-Compensating) Magnetic
Action
Compensating Bi-metal Element
Bi-metal Element
5^
jlK.Lo.ch irf^LCch «/*'
Linejf L*HBJ-ine |g  ■g^M   Line  jg^p^^Lin
7 fnntnrtc 7     Prtn+o^t<- I  ntrh' /
/ Contacts 7  Contacts      Latch/
Bi-metal Element        Bi-metal Element Contacts Broken
Current Limiter Action in TRI-PAC Circuit
Breakers
Current     Fuse Links
Limiter      / Spring
^Plunger
Trip Bar
Blown Current Limiter
i   Spring
Plunger Contacts
Broken
Load
Contacts
me   Load
A thermal element is generally best suited for conductor overload protection because its rating changes in about the same ratio as the average conductor rating changes with ambient temperature variations. The
thermal element consists of two bonded strips of metals having different
rates of thermal expansion. The heat of an excessive current will cause
the element to bend; the metal having the greater rate of expansion will
be on the outside (longer boundary) of the bend curve. Bi-metals have
inverse-time elements, providing a long time delay on light overloads
and faster response on heavy ones.
In this action, an electromagnet element is used. When a predetermined
current flows through the coil, the armature is attracted, initiating the
unlatching action, and causing the circuitto open. Magnetic trip settings
of magnetic only interrupters can be adjusted by varying the air gap.
A magnetic only interrupter provides overcurrent protection only, and is
thus well suited for use in combination motor control starters.
This action combines the features of both thermal and magnetic actions.
It provides instantaneous action on short circuits, yet permits momentary
overloads such as those encountered in initial lighting surges. Thermal
magnetic breakers are general purpose devices suitable for the majority
of breaker applications, and are considered the industry standard.
Ambient compensation is obtained by using an additional bimetallic
element which counteracts the effect of ambient temperature changes
on the overload bi-metal. (The magnetic element has been eliminated
from the schematic in order to show the thermal action more clearly.)
This temperature compensated trip provides a practically constant current rating over a wide range of ambient and is particularly suitable
where there are unusually high, low, or fluctuating temperatures.
TRI-PAC breakers have thermal magnetic and current limiting action.
For simplicity, the schematic shows only the current limiting portion of
the mechanism; thermal magnetic elements are the same as illustrated
above for standard breakers. When fault currents above the nominal
rating of the equivalent standard AB breaker are encountered, the silver
links in the current limiter melt, thus opening the circuit. This action
occurs with such rapidity that the current is limited to a relatively low
value. Simultaneously, the magnetic action of the breaker also functions
to open the breaker contacts and aids in clearing the short circuit. A
wire holding a plunger against the pressure of a spring will melt when
the silver links melt. This action causes the plunger to become extended
holding the trip bar in the unlatched position. Therefore, it is impossible
to reclose the circuit breaker until the blown limiter is replaced. Interlocks (not shown) will prevent relatching of the breaker if a limiter is
omitted and will also open the circuit breaker contacts before the limiter
plug-in contacts are broken if an attempt is made to remove the limiter
housing assembly with the breaker in the on position.
 <
Typical Specifications
Thermal Magnetic Breakers
Electrical Circuits shall be protected by
molded case AB De-ion® circuit breakers,
as manufactured by Canadian Westinghouse
Company Limited or approved equal. Each
pole of these breakers shall provide inverse
time delay overload protection and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of
a thermal-magnetic element. The minimum
interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers
shall be at least equal to the available short
circuit at the line terminals.
The breakers shall be operated by a toggle
type handle and shall have a Quick-make,
Quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the
handle so that the contacts cannot be held
closed against short circuits and abnormal
currents. Tripping due to overload or short
circuit shall be clearly indicated by the
handle automatically assuming a position
midway between the manual "ON" and
"OFF" positions. All latch surfaces shall be
ground and polished.
Breakers must be completely enclosed in a
molded case. Non-interchangeable trip
breakers shall have their covers sealed;
interchangeable trip breakers shall have the
trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy.
Arc extinction must be accomplished by
means of De-ion arc chutes, consisting of
metal grids mounted in an insulating support. Circuit breakers shall be listed with
C.S.A., conform to requirements of NEMA
Standards Publication No. AB 1 -1 969.
TRI-PAC® Breakers
When the interrupting ratings of standard
AB breakers are less than the available fault
current of the distribution system, TRI-PAC
breakers as manufactured by Westinghouse
shall be used.
These breakers shall be similar in construction to the standard Westinghouse AB De-
ion circuit breaker. On breakers with interchangeable, thermal, adjustable magnetic
trip, the accessibility and position of the
adjustment knob shall not be changed from
those on the standard breaker.
The breakers shall combine time delay
thermal trip protection, instantaneous magnetic trip protection and current limiting
protection in one complete assembly. The
above protective actions shall be so coordinated that overcurrents will be cleared by
the thermal action; short circuits of relatively low magnitude will be cleared by the
magnetic action; and high fault currents
above a predetermined point will be cleared
by the current limiters. The current limiters
shall not be affected when the thermal and/
or magnetic trip functions to clear the circuit. Regardless of which tripping device
serves to clear the circuit, all poles of the
breaker shall open automatically.
The breaker must not be resettable until current limiters which have functioned have
been replaced. The current limiters shall
have a visual means to determine which
one has operated and requires replacement.
The current limiters shall be mounted within
the breaker case and shall be readily accessible by removing a front cover.
TRI-PAC breakers shall meet appropriate
sections of NEMA Standards Publication
AB1-1969.
<
Further Information
Prices: Price List H-29-020
Application: Application Data H-29-060
Dimensions: Dimension Sheet H-29-040
Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 1 5
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc Maximum
 Descriptive Bulletin H-29-050 Page 1 6
AB De-ion® Circuit Breakers
15 to 2500 Amperes
600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc Maximum
Canadian Westinghouse Company Limited
Switchgear and Control Division, Hamilton, Canada 5M-6-70
 I *
1
TYPE XK
AUTOMATIC
SYNCHRONIZER
I.L.  H41-1005
INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION,
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
APPLICATION
■J£i)\
This device consists of a transformer and relay,   the synchronizer
being arranged to close its contacts when the generator voltage and frequency are approximately the same as the voltage and frequency of the a-c
bus or line.    It operates on the principle of the dark lamp method of synchronizing.
The contact of the synchronizer is closed if no voltage is on either
the machine or line voltage terminals.    If the synchronizer is switched
into operation by transfer switches,   the switching contacts must apply
potential to the synchronizer before connecting the synchronizer contact
in the closing circuit of the breaker or contactor,  with enough delay to
permit the synchronizer contact to open.    The breaker will close if the
synchronizer is switched into operation without voltage on either the generator or bus,   or with defective potential supply circuits.    It is recommended
that the breaker closing circuit be completed as a separate operation,
a2fter voltages have been checked to be normal.
The phase angle at which the synchronizer contact is closed is from
approximately 12 degrees before the point of synchronism to approximately
12 degrees after the point of synchronism providing the input voltages
and frequencies are closely matched.     The phase angle during which the
contact is closed becomes shorter as the frequency or voltage difference
between the two   inputs   increases.    The synchronizer will not operate with
input voltage differences of greater than 15% or frequency differences
greater than 3 cycles per second.
If generator voltage is normal and bus voltage absent,   the synchronizer will not function,  hence the synchronizer cannot be used to connect a generator to a de-energized bus.    The synchronizer contact will
not remain closed if the breaker trips after closing.    Special circuits are
required in some cases to prevent breaker pumping.
The synchronizer is intended for intermittent use and should not be
energized for an extended time from voltages which are not in synchronism.
It may be energized continuously after synchronizing.
Supersedes I.L.  H56-450-2
June,  19 64-.
 I.L. H41-1005
The synchronizer is mounted in a type FT-21 Flexitest case.    Only
six leads are required for connection to the synchronizer terminals,  one pair
of these from the generator side of the machine contactor,   one pair from
across the same phase on the load side of the contactor and one pair of leads
for the synchronizer contact circuit.
Burden at 120 volts is 20 VA 15 watts.
INSTALLATION
<em
Before any attempt is made to use the synchronizer,   the machine circuit should be phased out with respect to the bus,   to make sure that the phase
rotation of the machine is the same as that on the bus or line.    The wiring to
the synchronizer terminals should be checked to make sure that terminals 1
and 2 are connected to the generator side of the machine contactor,  and that
terminals 3 and 8 are connected to the corresponding phase on the line side of
the contactor.    It will usually be found convenient to make connections at the
terminals of the machine contactor or breaker.
The rating of the machine contactor coil should be checked to make sure
that it is the same as that of the control voltage source to be used and that the
current drawn by the coil is not in excess of the rating of the synchronizer contacts which follows:
5 amperes at 115 volts a-c.
3 amperes at 230 volts a-c.
1 ampere at 460 volts a-c.
1 ampere at 115 volts d-c.
When energy is placed on the synchronizer for the first time, the following tests should be made to insure correct operation and in order to avoid
possible damage to generator and switching equipment.
(a) Disconnect temporarily the main power leads on the bus (line) side of the
machine contactor,  but leave the leads connected which go to the syn-
c chronizer "Line" terminals.
(b) Open temporarily one of the leads to the machine contactor or breaker
closing coil.
(c) Bring the a-c generator up to speed and observe the action of the synchronizer (cover removed) as the machine voltage is raised slowly from
about 25% below normal to normal (rated) voltage.
The synchronizer relay should "Pick-up" and open its contacts at about
90% of machine rated voltage.    With machine at rated voltage,  the synchronizer
relay should stand with its contacts in the open position.
•
(d)
Replace the lead previously opened at the contactor closing coil,  and
bridge the auxiliary contacts on the machine contactor momentarily by
means of a jumper.    When this is done,   the machine contactor should
)
2.
 (e)
(f)
I.L.  H41-100 5
close, followed by the synchronizer relay dropping out and closing its
contacts.    This indicates that connections to the synchronizer coils are
correct.    The power   leads may be reconnected at the machine contactor terminals,  being careful to keep the proper phase relation.
Should the synchronizer contacts fail to close,  the "Line" connections
should be reversed at the synchronizer terminals and the test repeated.
Replace cover on synchronizer.
MAINTENANCE
t
No maintenance is required on the synchronizer except periodic inspection of relay and contacts.
RENEWAL PARTS
Moving contact assembly S#819792,   one required.
Stationary contact,  S#1097234,   total of two required.
In case of any difficulty which cannot be overcome,  write to the nearest
Canadian Westinghouse District Office,  giving complete nameplate reading of
the synchronizer, machine contactor,   and a-c. machine.
l\
 I.L. H41-1005
DB BREAKER   52
—o II o-
--II—
•'YH
•aw
XK Synchronizer
dwg.  307-A-858
A-C Bus
or line
SHe1-
ww
A
ft
SYrf
So*
Pot. Trans,
required on
550V & above only.
DB BREAKER   52
^XcT
&H!^-cV
STM
Tcs
4=CTO
)
TYPE XK SYNCHRONIZER WITH DB BREAKER
EXTERNAL DIAGRAM 307-A-S59
4.
 I.L.  H41-1005
,,
XK SYNCHRONIZER
FRONT VIEW
FRONT VIEW IN CASE
REAR VIEW
^y
FRONT    view
307-A-858
INTERNAL SCHEMATIC
 '-.. ^
I.L.  H41-1005
,.
'SiT
"^— "strife
-4*1
*
■*k*
PAME\_ LOC«\OM
•aCMl-FLO^H MTG
PROTECTION MTQi
z%-J j*- y *.»o-»w
HOLES    FOR.
MT&. SCREW*
9
PANEL CUTOUT i DRlLLIWfr
FOR  SEMI-FLUSH MT«.
190-32 SCREW
PANEL
SPACEP. FOR
THIN PANELS
-ie SCREW
(FOR THlC*.
PANEL  USE
JL-ib vruD)
0-32SCRCW
(ro« tvmcvs.
PANEL   U«sE
.190 -32 STUD)
DIA-
TERMINAL   ArtD
MOUNTING DETAILS
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS
IN IWCHCS
- DIA. IO HOLES
' OR CUT OUT
3Z
*• ••*♦»* 1 »*U- l-k-*W •«,■*!       DUMBER
32.
32.
TERMINAL
PANEL DRILLING OR  CUTOUT   FOR'
••ROTCCTION MT&.
(mOMT VIEW)
CW.CO. NOTE:
ALLOW AT LEAST 1' VERTICAL
SEPARATION BETWEEN MOUNTING
HOLES OF ADJACENT RELAY.
57-D-7901
,
OUTLINE AND DRILLING FOR FT-21 CASE USED FOR PROJECTION
AND/OR SEMI-FLUSH CASE
r
>
CANADIAN WESTINGHOUSE COMPANY LIMITED
HAMILTON   CANADA
 Catalog* ;
Section 7   Page 3
Westinghouse
m
Indoor Current Transformer
Type KTI, 600 Volts
Indicating and Industrial Application
100 to 1500 Amperes
KTI with mounting base
assembled
Application
The type KTI is an epoxy moulded indoor
current transformer for use with indicating
instruments for switchboards and other industrial applications.
The type KTI, rated 600 volts, is suitable for
operation with a bare primary conductor on
circuits up to its rated voltage and may be
applied to higher voltage circuits when used
with an insulated primary conductor.
Rating and Performance Data
Voltage class — 600 volts
Impulse test (BIL) — 10 Kv
1 min. 60 cycle test — 4 Kv
Frequency — 25-400 cycles
Continuous current rating at 30°C ambient:
100 thru   400 amperes — 200%
500 and 600 amperes   — 150%
800 thru 1200 amperes — 133%
1500 amperes —100%
55"Cat30°C ambient
30"Cat 55°C ambient
List Prices
Primary
Ampere
Rating
Without Mounting Base
Style Number
List Price
Approx. Net
Weight
(Lbs.)*
STNI
STI
100
. 150
200
237A970G01t
722C548L02
722C548L03
$18.00
18.00
18.00
$20.16
20.16
20.16
4
4
4
250
300
400
722C548L04
722C548L05
722C548L06
18.00
18.00
18.00
20.16
20.16
20.16
4
4
4
500
600
800
722C548L07
722C548L08
722C548L09
18.00
18.00
18.00
20.16
20.16
20.16
4
4
4
1000
1200
1500
722C548L10
722C548L11
722C548L12
29.00
29.00
32.00
32.48
32:48
35.84
4
4
4
Temperature rise •
tCSA 60 cycle metering accuracy:
100 thru 250 amperes — 1.2B0.1
300 thru 500 amperes —0.6B0.1,
0.6B0.2
600 and 800 amperes—0.3B0.1,
0.3B0.2
1000 amperes — 0.3B0.5
1200 and 1500 amperes — 0.3B0.9
tNot approved for revenue metering.
Note: Mounting base, when required, must be ordered as a separate item. They are not
furnished assembled on the transformer. Styles shown have same mounting dimensions.
Style Number 722C548L15., . $1.50 List (for Type KTI).
Style Number 447C337G03. . . $1.50 List (for Type ECI).
'Add 54 lb. for mounting base.
tType ECI, electrically and physically similar to KTI except Butyl rubber moulded.
STI prices include Federal Sales Tax at 12%
Prices subject to change without notice
October, 1968
Discount   V\   Ofi
Symbol      ■*»■««» O
 „Catalogue H-55-000, Section 7   Page 4
Indoor Current Transformer
Type KTI, 600 Volts
Indicating and Industrial Application
100 to 1500 Amperes
Dimensions — in Inches
L.V. POLARITY-
L.V. TERMINALS
.1*0-32 SCREWS WITH
CRIMP WASHERS - 2 TOTAL
2 HOLES PROVIDED FOR MOUNTINO BASE
^-£ « J SLOT - 4 TOTAL      *"T
^±b     .
.201 DIA. 2 HOLES
♦
-'a	
BASE ANO HARDWARE
OPTIONAL
ORDER AS SEPARATE ITEM.
IS        STYLE NO 722C54IU5
Typical Saturation Curves
..1560.J
.. I0OU.J
i
.
■■  500-5
.. Ana-*
■■  300-5
■■ 250-5
SM
-
is
■■   100-j
s
/ ,
/
//
■7
Construction and Design
Features
Primary Opening
The large primary opening is adequate for
bus bar or cable and is particularly suitable
for extra turns when required in multiple
ratio applications (see pages 5 and 6).
Core and Coils
The core, of high quality silicon steel, and
coils are completely moulded in a pleasingly
coloured epoxy compound, giving a clean,
smooth, modem appearance combined with
excellent electrical and mechanical properties.
Secondary Terminals
The secondary terminals are .190-32 screws
complete with crimp washers.
Markings
Complete identification along with rating
data is supplied on nameplate. Polarity
markers are permanently moulded into the
body of the transformer.
Mounting
The KTI can be flush mounted to panel or
platform by means of bolts through a pair of
mounting holes provided in the body of the
transformer. A steel mounting base with
hardware is also available, as a separate
item, to mount the transformer in an upright
position with secondary terminals in either
a vertical or horizontal plane.
Mounting is completely interchangeable
with the type ECI and most competitive
units.
Insulation
The homogeneous, tough epoxy insulation
resists oxidation, arc-tracking, moisture
penetration and will not crack due to coil
expansion with temperature variations.
.1 1.0
exciting current ompsret
 Catalogue H-55-000, Section 7   Page S
o
Westinghouse
Indoor Current Transformer
Type KTI, 600 Volts
Indicating and Industrial Application
100 to 1500 Amperes
Instructions for Use of KTI as a
Variable Ratio Transformer
The nameplate rating of the type KTI current transformer is based on the condition
that the primary conductor will be passed
once through the transformer opening. The
rating can be reduced in even multiples by
looping this conductor two or more times
through the opening. A transformer having a
rating of 200 to 5 amperes will be changed
to 50 to 5 amperes if four loops or turns are
made with the primary cable as illustrated
in figure 1.
Changes in rating can also be accomplished
by means of external turns added to or subtracted from the secondary winding. Due to
the relatively large number of turns in this
winding, these changes occur in small steps.
Figure 2 shows how turns may be added to
the secondary winding by connecting to the
"non-polarity" (X2) terminal stud and winding on turns in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 3 shows how turns can be subtracted from the secondary winding by connecting to the "polarity" (XO terminal stud
and winding on turns in the direction of the
arrow.
A frequent application of the window type
current transformer is for use with a 5 amp.
ammeter in motor load measurements. The
same meter can be used for different size
motors by making ratio adjustments as described above. The table on page 6 can be
used to select the desired ratio and to determine the necessary primary and/or
secondary turns for convening one of the
standard rated transformers to this value.
Calculations for this application are illustrated in the example below:
1. Determine the full load current of the
motor, i.e., 140 amperes.
2. Determine full scale marking of meter
dial, i.e., 0-150%.
3. Determine primary current by multiplying
the motor full-load current by the full-
scale meter marking, then dividing by 100,
150
Example: 140 X —— = 210 amperes
4. Use the following table to determine the
number of primary and secondary turns
needed for the particular transformer
available.
Example: 200:5 ampere transformer —
use 1 -turn primary and add two
turns to secondary;
400:5 ampere transformer —
use two turns primary and add
four turns to secondary.
Figure 1
load
line
loot)
load
line
I primary turn
■) —>-
2 primory turns
4 primary turns
1 Primary Turn
2 Primary Turns
4 Primary Turns
Nameplate
Ratio
Actual
Ratio
Nameplate
Ratio
Actual
Ratio
Nameplate
Ratio
Actual
Ratio
100:5
150:5
100:5
150:5
100:5
150:5
50:5
75:5
100:5
150:5
25:5
37.5:5
200:5
300:5
200:5
300:5
200:5
300:5
100:5
150:5
200:5
300:5     .
50:5
75:5
400:5
500:5
400:5
500:5
400:5
500:5
200:5
250:5
400:5
500:5
100:5
125:5
600:5
800:5
600:5
800:5
600:5
800:5
300:5
400:5
600:5
800:5
150:5
200:5
1000:5
1200:5
1000:5
1200:5
1000:5
1200:5
500:5
600:5
1000:5
1200:5
250:5
300:5
1500:5
1500:5
1500:5
750:5
1500:5
375:5
Figure 2: To Add Secondary Turns Figure 3: To Subtract Secondary Turns
 m- to meter
to meter
October, 1968
 Catalogue H-55-000, Section 7   Page 6
Indoor Current Transformer
Type KTI, 600 Volts
Indicating and Industrial Applications
f^\    100 to 1500 Amperes
Table to Determine Needed Number of Primary and Secondary Turns
primary current {or
secondary
pri
sec
1 primary currant for secondary
pri
sec
current of 3 amperes
mary
turns
ondary
turns
§ current of 5
imperes
mary
turns
ondary
1Q0/S
150/8
200/S
300/5
400/5
300/5
600/S
1 100/S
150/5
200/5
300/3
400/5
seo/s
600/S
turns
ratio'
ratio
ratio
ratio
ratio
ratio
ratio
1 ratio
ratio
ratio
ratio
ratio
ratio
ratio
150
200
230
350
450
550
650
+10
i   35
47.5
60
85
110
135
160
+ 8
145
195
245
345
445
545
645
+ 9
1   33.7
46.2
58.7
83.7
108.7
133.7
158.7
+ 7
140
190
240
340
440
540
640
+ 8
1    32-5
45
37.5
82.5
107.5
132.5
157.5
+ 6
135
185
235
335
433
533
63S
+ 7
1   31.2
43.7
56.2
81.2
106.2
131.2
156.2
+ 5
130
180
230
330
430
530
630
+ 6
§    30
42.5
35
80
105
130
155
+ 4
125
175
225
325
425
525
625
+ 5
1    28'7
41.2
53.7
78.7
103.7
128.7
153.7
+ 3
120
170
220
320
420
520
620
+ 4
1   27.5
40
52.5
77.5
102.5
127.S
152.5
+ 2
115
16S
21S
313
415
515
615
+ 3
1   26.2
38.7
51.2
76.2
101.2
126.2
151.2
+ 1
110
160
210
310
410
510
610
+ 2
1    2S
37.5
50
75
100
125
150
0
105
155
205
305
405
505
605
+ 1
i    23.7
36.2
48.7
73.7
98.7
123:7
148.7
- 1
100
ISO
200
300
400
500
600
0
1   22.5
35
47.5
72.5
97.5
122.5
147.5
- 2
95
145
195
295
395
495
395
-  1
1    21-3
33.7
46.2
71.2
96.2
121.2
146.2
- 3
90
140
190
290
390
490
390
- 2
I   20
32.5
45
70
95
120
14S
- 4
85
135
IBS
285
385
485
385
- 3
1    18.7
31.2
43.7
68.7
93.7
118.7
143.7
- 5
80
130
125
180
173
280
275
380
375
480
475
380
575
- 4
- 5
j    17.5
30
42.5
67.5
92.5
117.5
142.5
- 6
75
1    26
36
46
66
86
106
126
5
+ 6
70
120
170
270
370
470
570
- 6
1    25
35
45
65
85
105
125
3
+ s
65
115
165
265
365
465
56S
- 7
1    24
34
44
64
84
104
124
5
+ *
60
110
160
260
360
460
560
- 8
1    23
33
43
63
83
103
123
5
+ 3
55
103
155
255
365
485
535
- 9
1   22
32
42
62
82
102
122
5
+ 2
SO
100
150
250
350
480
550
-10
I    21
1   20
31
30
41
40
61
60
81
80
101
100
121
120
5
3
+ 1
78
100
128
175
225
278
325
2
+10
0
72.5
97.5
122.5
172.S
222.5
272.5
322.5
2
+ 9
1    19
29
39
59
79
99
119
5
-  1
70
95
120
170
220
270
320
2
+ 8
I    18
28
38
58
78
98
118
5
- 2
67.5
92.8
117.5
167.5
217.3
267.3
317.5
2
+ 7
1    I?
27
37
57
77
97
117
5
- 3
68
90
113
165
215
265
315
2
+ 6
i    16
26
36
56
76
96
116
5
- 4
62.5
87.3
83
112.5
110
162.5
160
212.3
210
262.5
260
312.3
310
2
2
+ 5
+ -4
1    1S
25
35
55
.73
95
113
5
- 8
60
1   20.8
29.2
37.5
54.2
70.8
87.5
104.2
6
+ 3
57.5
82.5
107.5
157.5
207.5
237.5
307.8
2
+ 3
i   20
28.3
36.7
53.3
70
86.7
103.3
6
+ 4
5S
80
103
153
203
288
303
2
+ 2
1    19-2
27.5
35.8
52.5
69.2
85.8
102.5
6
+ 3
S2.5
77.5
102.5
152.5
202.5
252.3
302.3
2
+ 1
i    18.3
26.7
38
51.7
68.3
85
101.7
6
+ 2
SO
75
100
150
200
290
300
2
0
1    17-3-
25.8
34.2
50.8
67.3
84.2
100.8
6
+ 1
47.5
72.5
97.5
147.5
197.5
247.3
297.3
2
- 1
1    16'7
25
33.3
50
66.7
83.3
100
6
0
45
70
95
148
193
243
295
2
- 2
1    15.8
24.2
32.5
49.2
65.8
82.5
99.1
6
- 1
42.S
67.5
92. S
142.3
192.5
242.5
292.5
2
- 3
1    18
23.3
31.7
48.3
65
81.7
98.3
6
- 2
40
65
90
140
190
240
290
2
- 4
i    14.2
22.5
30.8
47.5
64.2
80.8
97.S
6
- 3
1    13'3
21.6
30
46.7
63.3
80
96.7
6
- 4
37.5
35
62.5
60
87.5
85
137.3
187.5
185
237.9
233
287.5
285
2
- 5
- 6
133
2
1    17-1
24.3
31.4
45.7
60
74.3
88.6
7
+ 4
32.8
57.5
82.8
132. S
182.5
232.3
282.3
2
- 7
1    16.4
23.6
30.7
48
59.3
73.6
87.9
7
+ 3
1    15'7
22.9
30
44.3
58.6
72.9
87.1
7
+ 2
30
55
80
130
180
230
280
2
- 8
27.3
52.3
77.8
127.5
177.5
227.3
277.5
2
- 9
1    13
22.1
29.3
43.6
57.9
72.1
86.4
7
+ 1
23
SO
75
123
175
225
275
2
-10
1    14-3
21.4
20.7
28.6
27.9
42.9
42.1
37.1
56.4
71.4
70.7
83.7
85
7
7
0
— 1
SO
66.7
83.3
116.7
ISO
183.3
216.7
3
+10
48.3
65
81.7
115
148.3
181.7
215
3
+ 9
1    12.9
20
27.1
41.4
55.7
70
84.3
7
- 2
46.7
63.3
80
113.3
146.7
180
213.3
3
+ 8
1    12.1
19.3
26.4
40.7
55
69.3
S3.6
7
- 3
i    11-*
18.6
25.7
40
54.3
68.6
82.9
7
- 4
45
61.7
60
78.3
76.7
111.7
148
143.3
178.3
176.7
211.7
210
3
3
+ 7
+ 6
43.3
110
1    K.4
20.7
26.9
39.4
51.9
64,3
76.9
8
+ 3
41.7
38.3
75
108.3
141.7
178
208.3
3
+ 5
■    13.8
20.1
26.3
38.8
51.3
63.7
76.3
8
+ 2
|    13.1
19.4
25.6
38.1
50.6
63.1
75.6
8
+ 1
40
36.7
73.3
106.7
140
173.3
206.7
3
+ 4
38.3
S3
71.7
105
138.3
171.7
205
3
,     + 3
1    12.3
18.8
25
37.5
50
62.5
75
8
0
36.7
33.3
70
103.3
136.7
170
203.3
3
+ 2
1    ll-9
18.2
24.4
36.9
49.4
61.9
74.4
8
-  1
I    11.2
17.6
23.8
36.3
48.8
61.2
73.8
8
- 2
35
51.7
68.3
101.7
133
168.3
201.7
3
+ 1
I    10.6
16.9
23.1'
35.6
48.1
60.6
73.1
8
- 3
33.3
31.7
50
.48.3
66.7
65
100
98.3
133.3
131.7
166.7
165
200
198.3
3
3
0
-  1
I    12.8
18.3
23.9
35
46.1
57.2
68.3
9
+ 3
1    12.2
17.7
23.3
34.4
45.5
S6.7
67.8
9
+ 2
30
46.7
63.3
96.7
130
163.3
196.7
3
- 2
I    11.7
17.2
22.8
33.9
45
56.1
67.2
9
+ 1
28.3
45
61.7
95
128.3
161.7
19S
3
- 3
26.7
43.3
60
93.3
126.7
160
193.3
3
- 4
i    11-1
16.7
22.2
33.3
44.4
S5.6
66.7
9
0
1    10.5
16.1
21.7
32.8
43.9
55.0
66.1
9
- 1
25
41.7
58.3
91.7
125
158.3
191.7
3
- 5
1    10.0
15.5
21.1
32.2
43.3
54.4
65.S
9
- 2
23.3
40
56.7
90
123.3
156.7
190
3
- 6
1     9'4
15
20.5
31.7
42.8
53.9
65.0
9
- 3
21.7
38.3
55
88.3
121.7
155
188.3
3
- 7
1    H-s
16.5
21.5
31.5
41.5
SI.5
61.5
10
+ 3
20
36.7
53.3
86.7
120
153.3
186.7
3
- 8
1    11.0
16
21
31
41
51
61
10
+ 2
18.3
3S
51.7
85
118.3
1S1.7
185
3
- 9
1    10.s
IS.5
20.5
30.S
40.5
50.5
60.5
10
+ 1
16.7
33.3
50
83.3
116.7
150
183.3
3
-10
1   10.0
IS
20
30
40
50
60
10
0
1      9-5
14.5
19.5
29.5
39.5
49.5
59. S
10
-  1
1      9-°
14
19
29
39
49
59
10
- 2
1      8.5
13.S
18.5
28.5
38.5
48.5
58.5
10
- 3
 Westinghouse
err - .-..   —   '■'•.
,-,.... i^i..v-^^».^e*^***>*>IN •-#* i~.»swmw."!
.  .»*      '    'r-«J '.
Indoor Potential
Transformer
Type FT.GA, 600 Volt
For Metering and Indicating
■.<l.-rf-:^>-S^^T
i .^ii i, ai aw s ^—."iw*.-
.'-.*' .-'■.
r^Fti
,<r-;.;-.J .<.«'■.-< —_!'
. -\xi5^s*rM
PQ
.-:.'.-■ a»WSs*-^!<f'l
^.,,r.: s    ^s-Sjf?.'
15-: *:• jKi-ia *;: ^■^&&&&aa
Prices and Styles
Type PT.6A Unfused' Potential
Transformers
Application
The type PT.6A potential transformer has
been designed primarily for indoor metering
applications involving single meters either
1 phase or polyphase or combinations of
toads not exceeding 12.5 VA burden for 0.3
accuracy class and 25 VA where 0.6 accuracy class is satisfactory.
The type PT.6A is approved for Revenue
Metering at 0.3W0.6X accuracy, it may also
be used for low voltage switchgear for
operating instruments or other devices
within its burden capacity.
Rating Data
Voltage class — 600 volt
Frequency — 60 cycles
Min. thermal capacity — 400 VA
Voltage test — 4 KV — 1 minute
BIL —10 Kv
Metering accuracy      —0.3W0.6X*
Max. temperature rise — 55"C at 30*C ambient
'This  accuracy is approved for  Revenue  Metering
and is the value stamped on the nameplate.
Voltages
Ratio
Style
Number
List Price
STNI
STI
120-120
1:1
578C251L01
S45.00
S50.40
240-120
2:1
578C251L02
45.00
50.40
300-120
2.6:1
o*dC2b1L03
4b.00
50.40
360-120
3:1
578C251L04
45.00
50 40
480-120
4:1
578C251L05
45.00
50.40
•00-120
5:1
578C251L06
45.00
50.40
'For 600 volt (used transformers use type PT1.2A on
P«fle19.
Price Addition: Production Impulse Testing— »7.84 Net Per Unit STI.
Design Features
Small Size: Light weight: approximately
67" high by 4%" x 4V projected area;
weighs only 10 lbs.
Cor* and Coils: Completely moulded in a
coloured epoxy compound to give a clean
smooth modern appearance combined with
excellent electrical and mechanical qualities.
Available in full range of 6 primary voltages
with 120 volt secondary.
Packed: In individual cartons for greatest
user convenience.
Terminals: Primary and secondary terminals conveniently located and clearly
marked at top of transformer.
Removable High Strength Base: Held
securely by four screws for the convenience
of any user with special mounting requirements.
Completely Tested: For thermal stability
of epoxy compound.
Complete Line: Part of a complete line of
epoxy moulded instrument transformers in
the 600 through 15.000 volt class.
c
Scalable Protective Terminal Covers:
Terminals are protected by a simple mechanically-strong flat transparent plastic
cover for maximum safety. Both L.V. and
H.V. plastic terminal covers can be sealed.
July 1,1974
Supersedes February 1, 1974
STI prices include Federal Sales Tax at 12%
Prices subject to change without notice.
Discount   r%   "J *r
Symbol      la*"0 /
 . - H-55-000, Section 7 Page 18
r- " y- ■ \. ......
"fts-.1
Indoor Potential
^ Transforrnar
TypePT.6A
, *-\-^ •tw^d^iw ■ -swOMp -*****"■»..» M
*7V* '.'yy.fVMI -ree**^^ --.i?is-«f'.',**TJ*—~' ■«c<-^»»»M.—--^'.V-iH^
.».**»—f-"'--*T-4'rrfc*-»«n'^-*r.
Performance Data and Curves
Typical Performance Diagram
-.';«-:..:«.-f*. o !*»i£.V. * ->;■*>•■*;
*TT'':*TypieaI  Continuous   Load   Curve   at
Differ tut Ambient Temperatures
V
/^
Burden
W
X
VA
12.5
25
Burden Power Factor
10%
70%
To determine ratio and phase angle error at a
given load or burden, trace "VA" arc to desired power factor "radius" and from intersecting point, ratio and phase angle error
can be read. For example, at the "X" burden
(25 VA and 70% P.F.), trace 25 VA arc to
70% P.F. radius and from intersecting point
f
*
Dimensions — in Inches
(.Approximate)
Approximate Weight —10 Lbs.
"0", ratio correction factor — approx. 1.000
— and phase angle error — approx. + 10.5
minutes — can be read.
To meet a desired accuracy class, the intersecting point "0" must fall within the parallelogram marked with its accuracy. From
this typical performance diagram, accuracies
of the PT.6A at any burden and P.F. can be
determined. For example, 0.3% accuracy
can be obtained at burdens up to 20 VA and
P.F. 10% or up to 40 VA and P.F. 100%.
The400VA thermal rating of the PT.6A was
obtainei through a generous design. The
above curve gives typical values of maximum
load ttat can be applied for continuous
operation at various ambient temperatures
without exceeding permissible temperature
rise. iiUstrating the upgrading effect of
motidirg in epoxy in permitting operation
at higher temperatures.
u
 c#
♦
BROWN, BOVERI & CO., LTD., BADEN, SWITZERLAND
Price List AB 334a
I
..
Power and Directional Relays
Types CH, CG, CJ, CP
for monitoring the direction and size
of single-phase or three-phase alternating currents
May 1963
Contents:
Page
Notes  3
General  3
Type designations  4
Properties  5
Measuring principle and operation ..... 5
Mechanical construction  6
Setting the relay  9
Applications  10
Ordering instructions  14
Technical data  16
Weights and prices  18
Circuit diagrams:
Relay circuits  20
Examples of circuits in protective systems . 31
Dimensions  40
Nate
Orde
Inst™
Tech:
Dal
Wei-
•n
Rtl!
circu
Clrci
Diion
Supersedes
Price List AB 334,
November, 1960
Printed In Switzerland
 f
AB334a
BROWN, BOVERI & CO., LTD., BADEN, SWITZERLAND
May 1963
for operation by direct voltage, a field-weakening
contact is used to reduce the consumption when
energized. Hence only three contacts are available
on this type of contactor. (An exception is the type
PA contactor operated by alternating voltage and
having a time-lag of up to 1 s, which is not provided
with field weakening yet can be left energized
continuously.)
The contacts of the auxiliary contactors can be
make or break contacts; they can also easily be
changed subsequently from one kind to another,
12-
BROWN BOVERI
I
96361. Ill
Fig. 2a
Alternator reverse-power relay
type CH 90
with setting range 1-5 %
with built-in contactor type PA
in casing
instructions being included in the relevant operating instructions. However, not more than half the
contacts can be break contacts, so as to ensure
that all contacts make reliably on falling back, without the power for pick-up having to be increased.
Since the field weakening contact is always of the
break type, only one free contact can be a break
contact in type PA and PR contactors having field
weakening.
The particular circuit requirements for over-
current protection depende.-it on direction (seethe
circuit diagrams on page 37/38) make it necessary
for the auxiliary contactors in the CR relay
to be of a special design. These auxiliary contactors are energized from the outside by the
contacts  of an  overcurrent  relay and  become
BROWN BOVERI
Fig. 2b
Alternator reverse-power relay
type CH 90
with setting range 1-5 %
with built-in contactor type PA
removed from casing
9   a
 AB334a
BROWN, BOVERI & CO., LTD., BADEN, SWITZERLAND
May 1963
Type CI relays have a time scale calibrated as
a percentage. The tripping time corresponding to
this setting and the measurement quantity applied
to the relay can be obtained from a diagram on the
rating plate of the relay. See Fig. 6.
Setting the time-lag of the auxiliary contactor
On the retarded contactors type PA and PR, the
time-lag for pick-up or fall-back can be set on a
dial or by a pointer on the contactor itself. The
time-lag is only effective in one sense, i.e. during
pick-up in the case of type Pa and on fall-back for
type PR. The reverse movement, e.g. the pick-up
of PR, is instantaneous and thus takes place in the
inherent operating time of the relay, which is about
25 ms. The auxiliary contactors types PRF and
PAF which are built into the CS and CR relays are
set in the factory to a fixed time-lag and this is
marked on the relay.
o
Applications for type C directional and power relays
As a general rule, relays of the type CH and CG
are protective relays and are used in all cases
where single or three-phase power or its direction,
also at a fixed voltage the direction of the current,
i. e. the angle of the current against the voltage,
provides the tripping criterium.
CI power relays are employed in so-called
dependent, staggered protective systems, in which
the operating time of the protecting instrument is
dependent on the quantity being measured.
Type CP power supervisory relays are used for
monitoring the magnitude of the power. When
positive or negative deviations occur (the amount
of this deviation can be individually adjusted in
both cases), the respective contacts, which can
also be set to a predetermined desired value, are
actuated; these relays are mainly used as control
elements and they are accordingly designed for
frequent operation.
In the notes that follow, a number of commonly
used standard applications for CH and CG relays
are described. Besides these examples, the types
CH, CG, CI and CP power and directional relays
are used in a great variety of protective and specialized circuits. The manufacturer will be pleased
to propose particular designs and circuits to meet
special requirements, though appreciable deviations from the standard dimensions and circuitry
might involve extra costs.
1. Directional relay type CHO for the directional protection of lines against earth faults
(circuit diagram on page 31)
This protection against earth faults is used in
networks in which the neutral is earthed through
a resistor, so that earth-fault current contains an
appreciable resistive component. The installation
acts not only as an indication but sometimes also
serves to switch off the faulty tie lines.
For the protection of networks which are earthed
through arc suppression coils, for which selective
isolation of the affected line is seldom required but
rather a selective indication of the fault, the
specially designed directional earth fault relay
type CE can be employed in accordance with price
list AB 333. The measurement system of this relay
corresponds in principle to that of the CHO relay,
though the CE relay contains 2 built-in auxiliary
contactors, so that the two directions of the power
can be indicated.
The protective arrangement on page 31 cannot
be used in ring mains and in networks, since only
the selective isolation of tie lines can be achieved
with it. For the protection against earth faults of
meshed networks which are earthed through
resistors, comparative protective systems should
therefore be employed.
2. Directional relay type CH90 for the protection of a line against earth faults
(circuit diagram on page 32)
This protection is made use of in networks with
insulated neutrals, in which a sufficiently high
capacitive earth fault current is available. The
device indicates the outgoing tie line in which an
earth fault occurs. As in the previous section, comparative protective systems must be used in
meshed networks.
Basically, the connection of CHO and CH90
relays in comparative protective circuits on the
a.c. side should be carried out as detailed on
pages 31/32. The respective position of the relay
0
— 10 -
 9
*9
ft
.
AB334a
BROWN, BOVERI & CO., LTD., BADEN, SWITZERLAND
May 1963
contacts decides whether the relay trips or blocks.
In principle, the relay trips when it senses power
flowing into both ends of the line. Of course, the
protective installation should be so designed that
the charging power for the line alone does not
cause the relay to pick-up.
The choice and the layout of protective installations against earth faults, together with the
evaluation of the earth-fault and charging currents
or similar calculations can be provided on request.
3. Alternator reverse-power relay type CH90
(wiring diagram on page 33)
The purpose of this installation is to prevent
the alternator from being motored by the mains
when the prime mover (turbine) fails. Such a
failure endangers mainly the turbine itself, so that
the installation must be regarded first and foremost as a protection for the turbine. To prevent
the reverse-power relay from tripping due to short
circuits in the alternator or in the associated network, the relay should be provided with a time-lag,
which takes longer to operate than the other
alternator protecting devices. Delays of up to 5 s
can be achieved by means of the type P A5 auxiliary
contactor built into the same relay casing, longer
ones requiring a separate CS M2 or CS M2s time-
lag relay.
The reverse power relay often incorporates an
instantaneous release as well (through the instantaneous contact of the CS M2s time-lag relay),
which is nevertheless connected in series with a
pressure sensor, so that defects which necessitate
the immediate shut-down of the turbine also bring
'about the quick disconnection of the alternator.
The delayed-action trip remains as well.
Frequently and especially with large units, a
double-pole design of the reverse-power relay is
used in the double wattmeter layout, as described
in section 4 below.
4. CHO-2v power relay
(circuit diagram on page 34)
This relay consists of two measurement mechanisms on a common spindle; it is connected in
the double wattmeter method and can therefore
measure unsymmetrical three-phase power in networks without neutrals. These relays act mostly as
service relays and come into action when a power
supply is connected the wrong way round  or
exceeds a certain value. Such arrangements often
become necessary when tariffs are involved. The
action of this relay is usually retarded by time-lag
elements, e.g. by means of PA time-lag contactors
or CS M2 time-lag relays, so that it should remain
inoperative during transient power surges.
5. CH 26 inverse-power relay
(circuit diagram on page 35)
The inverse-power relay protects the alternator
against internal faults and is usedespecially with
machines from which the neutral is not brought
out, hence when differential protection cannot be
employed. The relay is supplied with the inverse-
power components of alternator voltage and current, measuring the product of these two quantities - the inverse-power. This remains zero as
long as the three-phase system is in balance. As
soon as assymmetry occurs and if the cause of
the displacement lies on the alternator side of the
protection, the relay measures inverse-power,
i. e. in the direction of the network; if the cause
lies on the network side, the power flows in
the other direction. The relay is thus in a position
to interrupt internal faults in the alternator selectively. It comes into action with all faults which
produce currents large enough to cause assymmetry in the system. It can therefore sense various
types of faults, such as short-circuits between
phases, inter-turn leakages and earth faults which
allow sufficient current to flow. Since its sensitivity
depends to some extent on the conditions in the
network, this relay cannot be defined as accurately
for individual types of faults as the more specific
protective relays and its action is slightly less
precise than these.
6. CG26. Directional earth-fault relay for alternators operating in parallel with networks
having an insulated neutral
(circuit diagram on page 36)
The selective stator earth-leakage protection of
three-phase alternators operating in parallel comprises a common earth-fault relay type CUD
(3xCUH90) per set of busbars. It detects the least
displacement of the neutral, as well as the phase
affected by the fault. By means of an earthing
transformer and a resistor, this relay causes the
phase following the one affected by the leakage
to be earthed. In addition, the CUD relay applies a
11 —
 AB 334a
BROWN, BOVERI &. CO., LTX., BADEN, SWITZERLAND
May 1963
suitable phase-to-phase voltage to the earth-fault
relay type CG26i. The active current to earth
produced by this change in resistance of one
phase, normally of the order of 5 A, flows in the
branch belonging to the affected alternator and is
thus measured by its earth-fault relay type CG26.
As soon as this relay picks-up, it switches the
alternator off. This protective system can detect
earth leakage over almost the entire length of the
winding. If the alternator network contains an arc
suppression coil, the circuitry has to be revised
slightly though the principle of the protection
remains the same. Full details can be obtained on
application.
0_;
1,2s
1,2s
-o	
1.2s
-o—
0,7s
-o—
0s
0,7s
-o—
0.3 s
-f°—
*    0s
0sL^>
-S
0,7:
s •*-
0,3s
0,3s
-o—
0s
■to-
0s
+o-
0,3s
Fig. 8
Protection of a meshed network with unilateral infeed.
Example giving the settings for the relay tripping times.
O Overcurrent, time-lag relay
■ Overcurrent, time-lag relay with directional relay, which only
initiates tripping due to faults in the direction of the line
Fig. 7
Principle which explains the production of the earth-leakage
current used by the selective relay protecting alternators
operating in parallel
1 = Alternator
2 = Earthing resistor
3 = Earth-fault relay
For the protection of alternators against earth
leakage in the stator when running with transformers in unit connection, a displacement voltage
relay connected to the neutral voltage suffices. The
effect of harmonics is eliminated by connecting
the polarizing winding to a phase-to-phase voltage.
Such relays, e.g. of the CUH90 type, are described
in price list AB 335.
7. Directional relay for the protection against
overcurrents depending on direction
(circuit diagram on page 37-39)
Such installations, a combination of overcurrent
and directional relays, are mainly used for:
a) Mutual graduation in ring mains with unilateral
infeed;
b) Protection at the consumer end of parallel,
unilaterally fed lines or parallel, unilaterally
fed transformers, for the selective isolation of
the affected paralleltie during short-circuits.
The relay reacts momentarily to the short-
circuit power flowing back through this line.
When more than two parallel lines are involved, a polygon connection of the protective
relays becomes necessary. Further details regarding particular cases are available on request;
c) Network junctions, with various tripping times,
depending on the direction of the short-circuit
power;
d) Cross differential protection of a two-circuit
line with bilateral infeed, the directional element
sensing the direction of the difference between
the two line currents, thus determining the
faulty section and then selectively isolating it.
Further details regarding particular cases are
available on request.
In all these protective devices, the directional
relays are momentarily connected to the measuring voltage by the overcurrent relay at the onset
of the fault. These relays have therefore only to be
designed for brief operating periods and can thus
be made very sensitive. Furthermore, their directional sensitivity is retained, even after extensive
failure of the voltage, also during short circuits in
all three phases.
In networks with temporarily low short-circuit
power or when the effect of the protection is to be
limited, a minimum impedance relay can be used
instead of the overcurrent relay to connect the
directional relay to the measuring voltage.
In protective devices against overcurrents
depending on direction, the directional relays are
connected to a phase-to-phase voltage and to the
current in the opposite phase. This ensures a
strong  relay  torque at all times during  short-
9
12 —
 o
9
•
AB334a
BROWN, BOVERI & CO., LTD., BADEN, SWITZERLAND
May 1963
Q
circuits in two phases, since the phase-to-phase
voltage for the relay in the phase affected by the
fault is virtually not influenced by the voltage
failure. Only when this failure occurs in all three
phases, thus a symmetrical and complete collapse of the voltage,'could the directional sensitivity be lost. For this reason, the normal function
of this relay is to prevent tripping. If the fault in the
three phases occurs close by, hence due to the
total collapse of the voltage, not enough torque is
developed, this blocking action will not materialize
and therefore disconnection is assured.
By the suitable use of the time delay in the
auxiliary contactors, which are fitted in any case,
the untimely tripping of the directional relay due
to the hunting occuring after faults can be avoided.
In insulated networks or those provided with
arc suppression coils, two-phase equipment is
sufficient in general, since in such cases the short-
circuit affects at least two phases. Mechanically
connected, three-phase directional relays are only
required at the consumer end of transformers with
star-delta connection, since the transformer circuitry produces currents which may make the correct operation of uncoupled relays doubtful following faults which occur beyond the transformer.
If it is necessary for double earth faults to be
sensed and indicated  in insulated  networks or
those provided with arc suppression coils, then
triple-pole protective relays must be used, just as
with networks with solidly earthed neutrals. Uncoupled relays are then usually employed.
For networks having weak earth-fault currents,
the more suitable installations should contain
standard directional relays in two phases and also
a type CHO directional relay, which is fed by the
summation current and the neutral voltage. The
circuit is then designed in such a way, that the
power relay only determines the tripping of the
circuit-breaker as soon as a summation current
appears.
The circuit diagram on page 37 shows the protection against overcurrent depending on direction
in an insulated network or in one provided with
arc suppression coils. An overcurrent, time-lag
relay type S supplies the energization.
The circuit diagram on page 38 shows the protective relay at the consumer end of double-circuit
lines with unilateral infeed. Energization by over-
current relay type  RB.
The circuit diagram on page 39 shows the relay
for the consumer side of parallel star-delta transformers with unilateral infeed. Mechanically
coupled directional relays are used to energize the
type RB overcurrent relays and for measuring the
direction of the power.
- 13 —
 /
•}
•
AB334a
BROWN, BOVERI A CO., LTD., BADEN, SWITZERLAND
May 1963
Technical Data
Owing to the wide variety of directional and power     The data regarding the auxiliary contactors are
relays types CH, CG, CI and CP, the technical data     listed at the end of this section.
of only the most important types are listed here.     The values quoted refer to standard designs; for
If further information is required, or data concern-     special designs, please make enquiries with us.
ing types not mentioned here, please write to us.
Data of relays types CH and CG                            Pick-up time of the measuring system:
Frequency: standard design: 50 c/s                                                at    10% Pn:   about 30 ms
special designs: 25, 40 and 60 c/s                                 at    20% Pn:  22 ms
Permissible current in the current coil during 1 s:                      over 100% Pn:  12 ms
about 50 times the rated current.                                  pN = re|ay ra\ed power
Capacity of the relay contacts (data for the auxiliary           = (relay rated current x relay rated voltage)
contactor contacts can be found at the end of this
section):      48-220 V = 35 VA inductive
12- 48 V = 20 VA inductive
Pick-up range and power consumption
Designation
Type
Pick-up range
*/. relay
rated power
Curre
rated current
A
nt coll
consumption
VA
Volta
rated current
V
je coil
consumption
VA
Power relay
CHO
CGO
0,5
1 or 5
3
110 (100)
24
2
5
5
110
6
Power relay
CHO-2v
0,75... 3,75
1 or 5
3,5
110
220
8,6
1 ...5
CH90
1 ...5
1 or 5
5
110
220
12
CG90
0.4 fixed
1 or 5
1,1
110
25
Reverse
current relay
1 CH90J
0,75... 3,75
1 ...   5
1 or 5  )
3,7
100
4
220
2,1
FT...  25
Oi'
380
7
20 ...100
1 or 5
1,7
110
0,7
Earth-fault relay
CG26
0,5 fest
1 or 5
1,8
100
35
Directional relay
(earth-fault)
CH045
1 .... 5
1 or 5
6
110
6
Directional relay
CR
CS
0,5
1 or 5
2,5
110
25
 c
%
0
AB334a
BROWN, BOVERI &.  CO., LTD., BADEN, SWITZERLAND
Circuit Diagram
Alternator Reverse Power Relay CH90
n
RST
£L
:Z
r
IT
3 CH90
VTTfh
21
!5
©4-
916 91-1
BROWN   ROVERI
(Protection of an alternator against being motored)
References:
1 Alternator
2 Voltage transformer
3 Current transformer
4 Reverse power relay type CH 90
Alternator main switch
May 1963
~   (
- 33 —
Diagram No. 583 e
 .-aJJtaarSI
•sw^s>
!».,-....   II.....II.     I... .... II II,  I     ,„,I....■»„.■!.. I.I.M.
PUBLICATION MNWI/1
Date: September, 1972
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
700 SERIES 4% in. LONG SCALE A.C.   AMMETERS AND VOLTMETERS
MOUNTING
Cut and drill panel as indicated in Fig.1. All drilling and
wiring on the switchboard should be completed before
mounting the instrument, and it is desirable to defer mounting as long as possible to reduce the risk of accidental
damage to the front cover of the instrument while work is
proceeding on the switchboard.
After mounting, correct any pointer deviation from zero by
means of the zero adjuster.
WIRING
Connect the instrument as shown in the appropriate diagram
overleaf. Terminal studs should be tightened sufficiently
to insure good contact but should not be over-tightened.
The use of spanners or wrenches with over-long handles
is, for this reason, deprecated.
The efficient magnetic screening of these instruments makes
it unlikely that they could be affected by stray fields, but
due precautions should be taken in keeping wires carrying
heavy currents as far away from the instruments as is
possible.
GROUNDING
On a metal panel which is itself grounded the instrument's
fixing studs will securely ground its case provided care
is taken to obtain a good metallic contact through any
paint on the rear surface of the panel. On non-metallic
panels one of the fixing studs should be connected to
ground.
If current or potential transformers are used, the grounded
side of the secondary should be connected to one of the
instrument's   fixing  studs.
AMMETERS
For motor circuits the use of an overload scale ammeter,
either self-contained or CT.-operated, is strongly recommended. Its 6-times overload scale enables the instrument
to withstand without damage frequent applications of high
starting currents.
Current transformers with a suitably scaled ammeter indicator must be used on all loads in excess of 30 amps
and on all circuits over 750 volts.
WARNING. If the secondary circuit of an energised current
transformer is open-circuited, dangerously high voltages
will be induced in its secondary winding. Any selector
switches used in the secondary circuit must be of a type
which guards against open-circuiting,
VOLTMETERS
Potential transformers with a suitable scaled voltmeter
indicator must be used on all circuits over 750 volts. All
voltmeters or their associated P.T's must be protected by
fuses.
CLEANING
Before wiping or cleaning the outer surface of the front
cover, all dust should be carefully brushed off to avoid
any scratches on its surface.
Any superficial scratching which the window area may
sustain can be removed by careful use of a proprietary
acrylic polishing agent. Care should be taken to avoid
contacting the window with spirit-based liquids as this
would cause severe crazing.
4 holes -^ dia *
* g- dia. if panel
thickness exceeds
X"
16
Fig.1. Panel drilling plan. For instrument
dimensions see Publication MNWD
COVER REMOVAL
Extreme precautions are taken in the factory to prevent
the ingress of any dust into the interior of the instrument.
Similar steps must be taken should it be necessary to
remove the front cover of the instrument for any reason.
The following procedure should be observed:-
1. On no account should the cover be removed in circumstances where ferrous particles however minute could
conceivably enter the interior.
2. Every precaution should be taken to avoid the entry of
dust. The operation should be carried out in reasonably
dust free conditions, and free from draughts or crosscurrents of air.
3. When the cover is removed it should immediately be
placed, inner surface downwards, on a clean sheet of
paper, so that no dust can settle on its inner surface.
Care should be taken not to rub or even touch the inner
surface so as to avoid damage to the anti-static treatment applied at the factory.
4. Should it be necessary to leave the cover off the instrument for any length of time, the instrument should be
screened from dust by being placed in a clean dust-free
bag or container, preferably transparent. Care should
be taken in doing this to avoid damaging the exposed
pointer, dial, etc.
5. The cover must be replaced carefully, to ensure that
the pin on the zero adjuster engages properly with its
slot in the zero-adjuster arm on the top cross-bar of
the instrument mechanism.
REPAIRS
These instruments have 'Hi-Q' taut band suspended movements; see PublicationMFNG for full details. They have no
pivots, jewel bearings, spiral control springs, or pneumatic or magnetic damping arrangements to sustain damage
or wear in use, andit is extremely unlikely that they will
ever need servicing or repair.
Should any instrument suffer such gross mechanical or
electrical abuse as to affect its operation it should be
returned to the factory for attention. The assembly and adjustment of the mechanism can be carried out only on jigs
especially designed for the purpose, and on no account
should repairs be attempted by any other personnel, however skilled.
FACTORY ADDRESS
Crompton Parkinson Electrical Limited,
0246 Boivin Street, City of LaSalle, Quebec, Canada.
 , t ■•■*
J©OIflpfl©Bl
UQ&i
'""**■■-^^^.irini iiillilhsyi if
PUBLICATION: MNWI/3
Date: September, 1972
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
700 SERIES 41/2 in. LONG SCALE FREQUENCY METERS
A
GENERAL
These self-contained instruments comprise (a) a frequency-
sensitive solid-state circuit of which the D.C. output,
varying with the applied A.C. frequency, is connected to
a moving coil indicator calibrated and scaled in cycles
per second.
The printed circuit board carrying the frequency-sensitive
circuit is mounted inside the instrument housing to the
rear of the indicator.
The principle of operation is described in Publication
MNWT/3.
The standard instruments are scaled 56/64 cycles for
operation on a nominal 60 cycles A.C. supply, but they
can be supplied for use on any specified frequency from
25 up to 3000 cycles. The maximum self-contained voltage rating is 480 volts; for higher voltages a 120-vo't
indicator   should   be   used   with   a   potential   transformer.
MOUNTING
Cut and drill panel as indicated in Fig.1. All drilling and
wiring on the switchboard should be complete before
mounting the instrument, and it is desirable to defer mounting as long as possible to reduce the risk of accidental
damage to the front cover of the instrument while work is
proceeding on the switchboard.
After mounting, correct any pointer deviation from the
zero   mark  on  the  scale   by  means  of the  zero  adjuster.
WIRING
Connect the instrument as shown in the appropriate diagram overleaf. Terminal studs should be tightened sufficiently to insure good contact but should not be overtightened. The use of spanners or wrenches with over-long
handles is, for this reason, deprecated.
The efficient magnetic screening of these instruments
makes it unlikely that they could be affected by stray
fields, but due precautions should be taken in keeping
wires carrying heavy currents as far away from the instrument as is possible.
All instruments or their associated P.T.'smust be protected
by fuses.
GROUNDING
On a metal panel which is itself grounded the instrument's
fixing studs will securely ground its case provided care is
taken to obtain a good metallic contact through any paint
on the rear surface of the panel. On non-metallic panels
one of the fixing studs should be connected to ground.
4 holes -fa dia*
*f- dia. if panel
thickness exceeds
Fig. 1. Panel drilling plan. For instrument
dimensions see Publication MNWD
CLEANING
Befou; wiping or cleaning the outer surface of the front
cove:", all dust should be carefully brushed off to avoid
any scratches on its surface.
Any superficial scratching which the window area may
sustain can be removed by careful use of a proprietary
acrylic polishing agent. Care should be taken to avoid
contacting the window with spirit-based liquids as this
would cause severe crazing.
COVER REMOVAL
Extreme precautions are taken in the factory to prevent the
ingress of any dust in to the interior of the instrument.
Similar steps must be taken should it be necessary to
remove the front cover of the instrument for any reason.
The following procedure should be observed:-
1. On no account should the cover be removed in circumstances where ferrous particles however minute
could conceivably enter the interior.
2. Every precaution should be taken to avoid the entry of
dust. The operation should be carried out in reasonably
dust-free conditions, and free from draughts or crosscurrents of air.
3. When the cover is removed it should immediately be
placed, inner surface downwards, on a clean sheet of
paper, so that no dust can settle on its inner surface.
Care should be taken not to rub or even touch the inner
surface so as to avoid damage to the anti-static treatment applied at the factory.
4. Should it be necessary to leave the cover off the instrument for any length of time, the instrument should be
screened from dust by being placed in a clean dust-free
bag or container, preferably transparent. Care should be
taken in doing this to avoid damaging the exposed
pointer, dial, etc.
5. The cover must be replaced carefully, to ensure that
the pin on the zero adjuster engages properly with its
slot in the zero adjuster arm on the top cross-bar of
the instrument mechanism.
 PUBLICATION MNWI/5
Date: September, 1972
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
700 SERIES 4% in. LONG SCALE WATTMETERS AND VARMETERS
MOUNTING
Cut and drill panel as indicated in Fig.1. All drilling and
wiring on the switchboard should be completed before
mounting the instrument,and it is desirable to defer mounting as long as possible to reduce the risk of accidental
damage to the front cover of the instrument while work is
proceeding on the switchboard.
After mounting, correct any pointer deviation from zero
by means of the zero adjuster.
WIRING
Connect the instrument as shown in the appropriate diagram
overleaf. Terminal studs should be tightened sufficiently
to insure good contact but should not be over-tightened.
The use of spanners or wrenches with over-long handles
is, for this reason, deprecated.
The efficientmagnetic screening of these instruments makes
it.unlikely that they could be affected by stray fields, but
due precautions should be taken in keeping wires carrying
heavy currents as far away from the instrument as is
possible.
POTENTIAL WINDINGS. Instruments can be supplied having
potential windings arranged for direct connection up to a
maximum of 750 volts (single element) and 450 volts
(double element). For some ratings they may be furnished
with external resistance boxes; these boxes are marked
with the serial number of the instrument with which they are
calibrated and must be used only with that instrument.
The potential circuits of the instruments, or their associated
P.T's, must be protected by fuses.
CURRENT WINDINGS. Instruments with one or two current
windings can be supplied with windings arranged for
direct connection up to a maximum of 20 amps. Current
transformers must be used with instruments having three
current windings and, for insulation purposes, with all
instruments where the supply potential exceeds 625 volts.
GROUNDING
On a metal panel which is itself grounded the instrument's
fixing studs will securely ground its case provided care is
taken to obtain a good metallic contact through any paint
on the rear surface of the panel. On non metallic panels,
one of the fixing studs should be connected to ground.
The grounded side of the secondary windings of all associated instrument transformers should be connected to one
of the instrument's fixing studs.
CLEANING
Before wiping or cleaning the outer surface of the front
cover, all dust should be carefully brushed off to avoid
any scratches on its surface.
Any superficial scratching which the window area may
sustain can be removed by careful use of a proprietary
acrylic polishing agent. Care should be taken to avoid
contacting the window with spirit-based liquids as this
would cause severe crazing.
4 holes -^ dia :
* -f-dia.if panel
thickness exceeds
Sl"
Fig.1. Panel drilling plan. For instrument
dimensions see Publication MNWD
COVER REMOVAL
Extreme   precautions are taken  in the factory to prevent
the ingress of any dust into the interior of the instrument.
Similar   steps  must  be   taken   should   it  be  necessary  to
remove   the  front cover of the  instrument for any reason.
The following procedure should be observed:-
1. On no account should the cover be removed in circumstances where ferrous particles however minute could
conceivably enter the interior.
2. Every precaution should be taken to avoid the entry of
dust. The operation should be carried out in reasonably
dust-free conditions, and free from draughts or crosscurrents of air.
3. When the cover is removed it should immediately be
placed, inner surface downwards, on a clean sheet of
paper, so that no dust can settle on its inner surface.
Care should be taken not to rub or even touch the inner
surface so as to avoid damage to the anti-static treatment applied at the factory.
4. Should it be necessary to leave the cover off the instrument for any length of time, the instrument should be
screened from dust by being placed in a clean dust-
free bag or container, preferably transparent. Care
should be taken in doing this to avoid damaging the
exposed pointer, dial, etc.
5. The cover must be replaced carefully, to ensure that
the pin on the zero adjuster engages properly with its
slot in the zero adjuster arm on the top cross-bar of
the instrument mechanism.
REPAIRS
Details of the construction of these instruments will be
found in Publication MNWT/5. The instruments have pivoted
staffs working in jewel bearings which are spring-mounted
to give protection against external shock and vibration.
In both single and double element instruments it is possible
to remove the complete moving-part assembly from the
mechanism (see Fig.1, Publication MNWT/5) to facilitate
servicing and repair.
Any servicing or repair work should be undertaken only by
fully-qualified personnel with the necessary test and repair
facilities, and it is recommended that wherever possible
any instrument in need of attention be returned to the
factory.
FACTORY ADDRESS
Crompton Parkinson Electrical Ltd.,
9246 Boivin Street, City of LaSalle. Quebec, Canada.
Page 1
 >r\f
... UL I ., *.A^, UJ
PUBLICATION MNWD
Date: September, 1972
DIMENSIONS AND TERMINAL LAYOUTS
700  SERIES 41/2in. LONG SCALE SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
s,
Xdim
it
«.<
r
r =>
l
'
ZPWfe
"THJUJi
ZBSB>
L
\ '
/FTERMINALS :SEE FOOTNOTE \
3£
DIA
i-28UNF FIXING STUDS
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
REAR VIEW
Type of Instrument
Dimension 'A'
Terminal Stud Location
Approx. weight lbs.
A.C. ammeter and voltmeter
3%
7.8.
2%
D.C. ammeter and voltmeter
33/8
7.8.
3%
Frequency meter
3V.
7.8.
3Va
Wattmeter and varmeter
-  Single phase
33/,
1.2.       5.6.
3V4
-  Three phase 3-wire
5'4
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.
5
- Three phase 4-wire
S%6
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9. 11.
5
Synchroscope
s%6
1.2.       5.6.
31/.
Elapsed Time meter
n
7.8.
21/«
Power Factor indicator
-  Single phase
SVu
1.2.       5.6.
3%
- Three phase balanced load
53^
3.4.      7.8.9.
3H
-  Three phase unbalanced load
53At
1.2.3.4.5*6.7.8.9.
3%
Temperature ind. bridge-operated
53/i6
1.2.             7.8.9.
m
Temperature Ind.
integral amplifier
5V>t
1.2.             7,8.
41/2
Physical Units Indicator
5%6
1.2.             7.8.
4'/a
Position Indicator
53A„
1.2.             7.8.9.
4Vi
Phase Sequence Indicator
5%„
7.8.9.
3%
FOR DRILLING PLAN
SEE OVERLEAF.
See separate Installation Sheets for terminal and grounding stud connections:-
MNWI/1:  A.C. ammeters and voltmeters      MNWI/2:   D.C. ammeters and voltmeters.    MNWI/3:   Frequency meters
MNWI/4:  Power Factor Indicators, Rotary Synchroscopes.      MNWI/5:  Wattmeters and Varmeters.
TERMINALS:    Ammeters up to 30 amps, and all other instruments: 10/32 UNF, Ammeters over 30 amps up
to 50 amps: 54-28 UNF.
FIXING STUDS: Standard length is %•, suitable for panels up to 5/i» " thick. Adaptor mounting studs can be
supplied for panels over '/u" thick; thickness of such panels to be specified when ordering.
Page 1
 3  *
tiafc..'' i  i   Mill!... ib.. ■
Crompton Parkinson Electrical ltd.
,ri   'in'iV iiii.if ,\-Y«tK,tt*    .I,     ■?.'»■ f
32
PRICES
SANTON
ROTARY SWITCHES
1CTR1CAL EQUIPMENT
Sheet - M-150
Page 3
Date: Jan. 15 -63
As a convenience, you will find listed below some of the more commonly used Instrument Transfer Switches.
Switch
Catalogue No.
SRP139V
SRP117AY28
SRP115AB74
Type
Voltmeter Switch
Sequence to give:-
3 phase to phase readings and Off position on
3 phase, 3 wire systems with or without P.T.s up
to 600   volts and, if required, with 2 P.T.s for line
voltages over 600 volts.
Voltmetet Switch     3 phase to neutral readings and Off position on
3 phase, 4 wiie systems with or without P.T.s up
to 600 volts or with 3 P.T.s on line voltages
over 600 volts.
Voltmeter Switch
SRP1312AB89 S Voltmeter Switch
SRP138ME52
SRP1310MB24
SRP1318ME53
Ammeter Switch
Neutral to each line (2) voltage readings with two
Off positions on single phase, 3 wire systems
with or without P.T.s up to 600 volts.
3 phase to phase, plus, 3 phase to neutral voltage
readings (No Off position) on 3 phase, 4 wire
systems with or without P.T.s up to 600 volts
or with P.T.s on systems over 600 volts.
3 phase current readings and Off position on a
3 phase, 3 wire system with 2 C.T.s.
Ammeter Switch       3 phase current readings and Off position on a
3 phase, 3 wire  or 3 phase 4 wire system with
3 Star connected C.T.s. Switch can only be
wired at the end of the C.T. secondary circuit.
Ammeter Switch
SRP129MC86
SRP139MT33/TA
SRP1210AW96/TB
Ammeter Switch
Goveinot
Control Switch
Synchronizing
Switch
Same as Cat. No. SRP1310MB24 except that
Cat. No. SRP1318ME53 can be placed anywhere
in the C.T. secondary circuit.  This Switch can
also be used on 3 phase 4 wire circuits with
3 Delta connected C.T.s.
Outer current readings witli 2 Off positions on
a single phase, 3 wire system using 2 C.T.s -
one in each outer.
Raise and Lower control of either series, shunt
or split field. Governor Control motor (handle
with spring return to Off).
Synchroscope connections between Alternator
bus lines - with or without P.T.s (this switch
has removable handle).
ALL PRICES ARE F.O.B. FACTORY, MONTREAL - SALES TAXES EXCLUDED
PRICES & TECHNICAL INFORMATION  SUBJECT TO  CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
 AGASTAT
TRADE MARK
j—        time / delay / relay
INSTRUCTIONS for
INSTALLATION
and
OPERATION
Every AGASTAT time/delay/relay is a precise
timing instrument which balances pneumatic,
electrical and mechanical forces in a unique design using a minimum of moving parts. Its accuracy and performance to specifications have
been carefully tested before shipment. Properly
applied, it offers exceptional life expectancy. A
few minutes spent in familiarizing yourself with
these   instructions   will   help  you   get   the   best
fiossible service from this unit in your applica-
ion.
Because of the skilled calibration and adjustment required on certain components prior to
final assembly, we recommend that field servicing be limited to the replacement of the
switchblock and coil assemblies listed on back.
These have been designed to insure factory-
built performance after field servicing without
elaborate calibration. In cases where damage or
abuse make it impossible to restore satisfactory
performance by replacing these assemblies, the
unit should be returned To the factory for repair
or replacement.
—■
2412 SERIES
TIME   DELAY   ON   PICK   UP
When the coil (1) is energized, it picks up (or
pulls in) the core (2), allowing diaphragm spring
(3) to force spindle assembly (4) against diaphragm (5). Diaphragm forces air trapped in the
timing chamber (6) out through an adjustable
orifice. The rate of flow, which determines the
length of time delay, is adjusted by means of
the calibrated dial (7) or needle valve (7A) on
the timing head. As the air is forced out of the
timing chamber (6) the spindle assembly (4)
moves upward, and the collar (8) on the end of
the spindle trips the switch blade (9) past the
overcenter point, transferring the contacts from
the NC to the NO position. Switch remains in
this position as long as coil is energized.
When the coil is deenergized, the core and
spindle return instantly to the normal position,
assisted by the downward pressure of the recycle spring (10), which was compressed by the
core on its upward stroke. At the same time,
air is rapidly drawn into the timing chamber
through a one-way valve in the diaphragm, and
the switch resets to its initial position.
mOW5K)m
COIL
J
V-
V
Y    up   Y
TYPE!
"V
V
3-5 4-6
(INC)
CONTACTS
1-5 2-6
(NO)
iL
i
i
IT
ENERGIZED
DEENERGIZED
CLOSED
-   OPEN
DELAY
SETTING
rc
-   CLOSED
OPEN
2422   SERIES T,ME   DELAY  ON   DROP OUT
When the coil (1) is energized, it pulls down (or
pulls in) the core (2), which is rigidly attached
to the spindle assembly (3). This compresses
operating spring (4) and trips switch assembly
(5), transferring its contacts from the NC position to the NO position. Air is simultaneously
drawn rapidly into the timing chamber (6)
through a one-way valve in the diaphragm (7).
When coil (1) is deenergized, the core (2) and
spindle assembly (3) are forced up against the
diaphragm  (7)  by the operating spring (4).  Air
trapped in the timing chamber (6) is forced out
by the diaphragm (7) through an adjustable
orifice. The rate of flow, which determines the
length of time delay, is adjusted by means of
the calibrated dial (8) or needle valve (8A) on
the timing head. As the air passes through the
orifice, the spindle assembly (3) continues upward until the collar (9) on the end of the
spindle trips the switch assembly (5), returning
the contacts to their initial position.
MOW«K)
Br-'inll        E-33 ▼
Y Y     OUT     v
TYPE 2
W
COIL
1-5 2-6
(NC)
CONTACT
3-5 4-6
(NO)
ENERGIZED
DEENERGIZED
-  OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
DELAY   i
SETTING r
SR-15-X
6-65
2400 SERIES
 MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS
Normal mounting for the basic 2400 Series unit
is in a vertical position, from the back of the
panel. Four 8-32 tapped holes are provided in
the back plate, making it interchangeable with
earlier AGASTAT models. Mounting screws
should not project more than 5/32" into the
back of the unit, to prevent internal damage.
A front mounting bracket and the screws required to attach it to the relay are also supplied
with each unit. This extends approximately 3/8"
from each side of the unit, and permits installation from the front of panels.
All 2400 Series units may also be mounted horizontally. If horizontal mounting was not specified on your order, unit may require adjustment
to match horizontal timing with dial markings.
This is accomplished by moving lower collar up
or down on spindle. While holding spindle stationary with 1/16" Allen wrench, use 1/4" open
end or socket wrench to reposition collar. Screw
collar up (clockwise) to decrease time, down
(counterclockwise) to increase time.
HORIZONTAL PANELMOUNT (Code Y) - This
mounting option allows you to mount the
AGASTAT relay through-the-panel, with the adjusting knob and dial plate out front, while the
terminals and mechanism are protected behind
the panel. To install, remove the knob by loosening its setscrew with a 5/64" Allen wrench. Remove the 3/4" hex nut and washer, as well as
the two 6-32 Phillips head screws. The dial plate
may now be removed and used as a drilling
template for locating the two .156" diameter
screw holes and the single .625" diameter shaft
hole required for mounting. When replacing the
adjusting knob, be sure to seat the setscrew
located opposite the pointer on the flat of the
shaft before tightening, to insure that the unit's
factory calibration is maintained.
AUXILIARY SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
2412 SERIES
1.    INSTANT  TRANSFER   AUX.  SWITCH  (CODE   L)
Aux. switch should transfer immediately when
AGASTAT coil is energized, and should reset immediately following coil deenergization. If it fails to
reset, loosen screw in slotted hole of mounting
bracket and move switch closer to terminal block.
2.   TWO  STEP AUX. SWITCH (CODE T)
Aux. switch should transfer following first delay
period after coil energization, and should reset immediately following coil deenergization. Adjust delay before aux. switch transfer by turning actuator
screw clockwise to increase delay, counter-clockwise to decrease delay. Use 1/16" Allen wrench.
2422 SERIES
1.    INSTANT TRANSFER   AUX.  SWITCH  (CODE  T)
Aux. switch should transfer immediately when
AGASTAT coil is energized, and should reset immediately following coil deenergization. To change
aux. switch delay period, see instructions below for
two step operation.
2.   TWO  STEP AUX.  SWITCH (COOE  T)
Check operation as for instant Transfer, above.
Adjust delay before aux. switch transfer by turning
actuator screw clockwise to increase delay, counterclockwise to decrease delay. Use 1/16" Allen wrench.
RECOMMENDED   MAX.    AUX.   SWITCH    DELAY    IS  25%    OF
TOTAl  DELAY   PERIOD,  BUT  NOT   EXCEEDING 30  SECONDS.
CONTACT RATINGS
Contact Capacity in Amperes (Resistive Loads)
Contact
Voltage
Min.100,000
Operations*
Mm. 1,000,000
Operations *
30 vdc
15.0
7.0
110 vdc
1.0
0.5
120 v 60 cps
20.0
10.0
240 v 60 cps
15.0
7.0
480 v 60 cps
2.5
1.0
•Continuing life test programs indicate that
maximum operations under these loads will
average  over three  times these  minimums.
Inductive and capacitive loads should not have
inrush currents that exceed five times normal
ooerating load.
Printed in Canada
2412 SERIES
TIC ROD SCREW
V
c:
/?
2422 SERIES
IN /%
OPE RATING
SPRING
DC i , J AC
COIL   rSTAMH -
COIL   ASSEMBLY mf
-COIL  FRAME
CORE  STOP   PLATE
REPLACING SWITCHBLOCK AND COIL ASSEMBLIES - 2412 AND 2422 SERIES
Switchblock assemblies are universally interchangeable between all standard 2400 Series
units. The same assembly Is used for A C and
REMOVING SWITCHBLOCK
1. Remove four tie rod screws
2. Hold timing head and coil assembly
in one hand, switchblock in the other.
3. Slide switchblock </i" forward of coil
assembly to center spindle in large
end of keyhole slot in switch blade.
(See diagram A).
4. Slowly lift timing head and coil assembly off switchblock, being careful
to keep spindle collar away from
switchblade while withdrawing it.
REVERSE THIS PROCEDURE TO INSTALL
NEW SWITCHBLOCK.
REMOVING COIL
Follow  steps   1   to  4  above,  then:
5. Remove timing head and core assembly. (On 2422 Series units the core
stop plate and operating spring are
loose pieces, located below the core
rather than attached to the timing
head and core assembly, as on the
2412 Series units. These two pieces
should be removed before removing
the coil frame, to prevent loss of the
loose spring.)
D C models for delay on pull-in or delay on
drop-out service. Coil assemblies are not
interchangeable between A C  and  0 C   models.
Coil Data
Operating Operating
Coil Rated Voltage Rated Voltage
Part Coda        Voltage Range Voltage Range
Number       Letter c 60 cps (a SO cps
2400
120
102- 132
110
93.5 ■ 121
AC
c
460
408
528
D
550
468
605
E
24
20.5
26.5
F
127
108
140
G
240
204
264
H
12_
10.2
13 2
1
6
5.1
6.6
AC   SPECIALS    Ll. L2. etc
A C Coils (Part No. = 2400 followed by dash and code letter above)
Coll
Part Code
lumbar       Letter
Operating
Rated Voltage
Voltage Range
22.5 • 33 5
0
24
19.2    28 8
p
120
96    144.
Q
12
9.6    144
R
60
48 - 74
S
250
200    300
T
550
440    660
V
32
25.6    38 4
w
96
76.8    115
DC  SPECIALS    XI. XZ. etc.
0 C Coils (Part No. = 2410 lollowed by dash and code tetter above)
Aft units draw approximately 8 watts power at rated voltage.
Minimum operating voltages are based on vertically mounted
2412 (Type 1) untts.2412 horizontally mounted or 2422 (Type
2) vertically or horizontally mounted units will operate satis-
factonly at minimum voltages approximately 5% lower than
those listed.
A C units drop out at approximately 50% of rated voltage.
0 C units drop out at approximately 20% of rated voltage.
Ail units, may be operated on intermittent duty cycle at voltages
10% above the listed maximums. (Intermittent duty—maximum
50% duly cycle and 30 minutes "on" time.)
NOTE: 2412 (Type 1) models ONLY
require removal of "E" ring from core
to permit removing core from coil.
6.   Slide off coil frame.
When installing new coil, be sure to replace coll frame
with proper side up. Number "1" on back of frame
should be up on 2412 (Delay on Pull-in) Models.
Number "2" should be up on 2422 (Oelay on Drop-out)
Models. See Diagram B.
On 2412 models, replace "E" ring in core slot after
assembling coil frame to coil.
REPLACEMENT ASSEMBLIES
PART NO.
2412-30
2400- (AC)
2410- (DC)
2412-120
2412-12i
DPDT Switchblock
Assembly
Coil Assembly, voltage as specified
by code letter
(See Coil Data
Chart)
Auxiliary Switch Kit
(Code L)
Auxiliary Switch Kit
(Code T)
TIMING RANGES
A   .1 to 1 sec.
F   .5 to 10 min.
B   .2 to 5 sec.
G    1  to 20 min.
C     .8 to 15 sec.
H   1 to 30 min.
D   2.5 to  50 sec.
1    2 to 60 min.
E   10 to 200 sec.
All dial head units are furnished with dials
calibrated in linear increments covering the
range selected. In addition, ranges C through I
provide non-linear adjustment from .2 seconds
to the beginning of the linear zone. For easiest
adjustment and lowest cost, the shortest time
range suitable for the application should be
selected.
In addition to the dial head models above, the
2400 Series AGASTAT is also available with
needle valve adjustment. They are recommended
only for applications where frequent readjustment of the delay period is not required, or
where initial cost is a prime consideration. One
timing range is offered:
N
■2 to 300 sec.
All needle valve models are factory adjusted to
the delay specified; if no delay is specified, the
unit is set for an approximate 10 seconds delay.
To change this setting, turn the adjusting screw
SLOWLY clockwise to increase the time delay,
counterclockwise to decrease it, as indicated by
the "increase" and "decrease" arrows on the
timing head. CAUTION: Turn the screw only a
fraction of a revolution before each timing
check to avoid damaging the needle or orifice.
 I
s*
na
UCO 5/10 A C CONTACTOR/RELAY SYSTEM
3
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
I
1
I
F
SIZE 5, MODEL UCO 5 CONTACTOR/RELAY
12 POLE RELAY
CONTACTOR/RELAY Open Type
a-c     d-c
IBank-   4 pole        $12.   $18.
2 Bank -    8 pole        $17.   $23.
3 Bank - 12 pole        $22.   $28.
Advise coil voltage, frequency and contact arrangement required.
REVERSING CONTACTORS
Lett hand Right hand
General Purpose
Enclosure
CEMA Type 1
a-c d-c
$17. $23.
$22. $28.
$27. $33.
10 AMP
600 VOLT MAX.
HORSEPOWER
RATING:
Three
phase
1
2
5
6
110v.
220 v.
440 v.
550 v.
Single
phase
Yi
1
or vice versa
a-c
d-c
a-c
d-c
1 Bank
—   4 pole
1 Bank -
4 pole
$27.
$39.
'     $32.
$44.
2 Bank
—    8 pole
1  Bank -
4 pole
$32.
$44.
$37.
$49.
3 Bank
— 12 pole
1  Bank -
4 pole
$37.
$49.
$42.
$54.
2 Bank
-    8 pole
2 Bank -
8 pole
$37.
$49.
$42.
$54.
3 Bank
-12 pole
2 Bank -
8 pole
$42.
$54.
$47.
$59.
3 Bank
— 12 pole
3 Bank -
12 pole
$47.
$59.
$52.
$64.
Advise coil voltage, frequency and contact arrangement required
on left and right hand sides.
TIME DELAY RELAY
No instantaneous contacts
4 instantaneous contacts
8 instantaneous contacts
12 instantaneous contacts
a-c
d-c
a-c
d-c
$36.
$42.
$41.
$47.
$41.
$47.
$46.
$52.
$44.
$49.
$50.
$55.
$49.
$55.
REVERSING CONTACTOR
Advise coil voltage, frequency, on-delay or off-delay and
instantaneous contact arrangement if required.
TIME DELAY RELAY
ON-DELAY OR
OFF-DELAY
0.5 -180 seconds
a-c     d-c
$31.   $37.
$36.   $42.
MECHANICAL LATCH RELAY
a-c d-c
IBank-    4 pole       $26. $32.
2 Bank -    8 pole       $31. $37.
3 Bank - 12 pole       $36. $42.
Advise coil voltage and frequency of main and latch coils and
contact arrangement required.
SEE COIL DATA PAGE 21-CONTRACTOR RATING CHART PAGE 29
MODIFICATION AND RENEWAL PARTS SEE PAGE 9
LATCH RELAY
OVERLAP CONTACTS available for YELLOW or GREEN contact banks at an extra charge of $2.00 per pair of poles
~r
iFFm
*H,*
A
flflfl
*G IA
iFFi
LA
A
5/32
B
1/4
C
3/4
D
2
E
2.1/2
F
2.13/16
*G
3.1/2
*H
3.7/8
J
4
K
5.1/2
Note the following increases in this dimension
when using:
DC Solenoid - 11/16 in.
Timing Attachment -- 1.1/2 in.
Latch Attachment -- 1.5/8 in.
Additional Contact Bank -- 15/16 in. per bank
Prices do not include sales tax and are subject to change without notice.
15/6/71
 UCO 5/10 A C CONTACTOR/RELAY SYSTEM
SIZE 10, MODEL UCO10 CONTACTOR 20 AMP
600 Volts Max.
General Purpose HORSEPOWER
Enclosure PATIkir
Open Type    CEMA Type 1 KA ' INO
MODEL UCO10
CONTACTOR TRIPLE POLE a-c     d-c a-c     d-c Three Single
with one convertible auxiliary contact      $21.   $27.        $26.   $32. Phase Phase
MODEL UCO10R
REVERSING CONTACTOR
with one convertible auxiliary contact      $46.   $58.
on each contactor
$61.   $73.
2 110V        1
5 220V       2
10 440V
10 550V
1
OPTIONAL FACTORY OR USER MODIFICATIONS.
See opposite page for specifications and prices.
ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY CONTACTS
•y contacts mai
-YELLOW 2N0
BROWN    4NO-ONC
Four non-convertible auxiliary contacts may be added
by using; PACK 3 SIZE 5 YELLOW 2NO-2NC
TIME DELAY ATTACHMENT
This must be used with one PACK 3 SIZE 5 Y-B
or a  PACK 4 SIZE 5 black dummy bank.
LATCH ATTACHMENT
This may be used with or without additional
auxiliary contacts.
SE E COIL DATA PAG E 21
CONTACTOR RATING CHART PAGE 29
MODIFICATION AND RENEWAL PARTS OPPOSITE PAGE
(   ,
[\         1
/
A
J|
m
,ll
.   I            II             L
E3
i 1
j i
I
S
y
jy
§§
m
~2
PACK   1   SIZE  S
AC SOLENOID
PACK  2 SIZE  5
AC  COIL
(DC   ALSO  AVAI
PACK  5 SIZE   5
TIME  DELAY
ATTACHMENT
PACK 3 SIZE  5
ADDITIONAL
AUXILIARY
CONTACTS
PACK 3 SIZE  H
UCOI 0 MAIN
CONTACT   BAN
3  POLE  WITH
1   CONVERTIBLE
AUXILIARY
CONTACT
^
Kn^
~
J             1
1           1         1            L
!
C3 j
1
'
r
Is
s
i
r
G
 »—
MrM^P,    P.
A
ins.          5/32
B
9/32
C
3/4
D
1.5/16
E
2.1/8
F
2.1/2
G
2.5/8
H
ins.         3.1/16
J*
3.9/16
K
3.3/4
L
4.1/16
M*
4-1/8
N
4.1/4
0
5.3/4
*   Note the following increases in this dimension when using:
DC Solenoid --11/16 ins.
Timing Attachment — 1.1/2 ins.
Auxiliary Contact Bank -- 15/16 ins.
15/6/71
Prices do not include sales tax and are subject to change without notice.
 %
0
<
II
a
a
P
a
a
o
a
a
n
ii
UCO 5/10 A C CONTACTOR/RELAY SYSTEM
PACK 1 SIZE 5
PACK 1 SIZE 5 dc
Solenoid assembly
and baseplate.
Price each
a-c $2.75
d-c $5.50
MODIFICATION AND RENEWAL PARTS
PACK 2 SIZE 5
PACK 2 SIZE 5 d-c
Operating Coil Specify
Voltage and frequency see
data page 21
Price each
a-c $3.75
d-c $7.00
Approved Contact Combinations
UCO    5
Circuit
Required
N/O    N/C
0     0
4     0
2     2
3      1
0     4
Coloured Red
4 . 4
8    o
6     2
12    O
10    2
5     3
7      1
Relay
N/O   N/C
Coloured
Brown
Coloured
Yellow
Coloured
Green
4 g
4 g
4        c
4 g
4 0
2 2
Relay
with timer
On-delay
B-l'I'I'Lal
nrnn
Ema
mm
terra
mm
fcll'H. J
'3 1 i
Relay
with timer
Off-delay
EJCCJ
I2 2l
■■ii.'.ij.M
a    "
■aH'H.al
|0 41
ana
'3 1 i
Relay
with
Latch
14 0
fail
_4 g_
_4 o
_4 o_
aPESHB
^4 g_
4 g_
2 2
UCO    10
"Circuit-
required in
addition to
main
contacts
N/O    N/C
0
1
0
1
3
2
Contactor with and without UC05 contact bank
B       Ql
a    a
E33ESH
Contactor
with
timer
On-delay
fa ni m
4 0
Contactor
with
timer
Off-delay
PI 'if Hi'W
mmm
4 0
Brnca
Contactor
with
Latch
pM.'.f.WfflJ
■naa
2 2
*UC010 main contact bank is fitted with one convertible auxiliary
in addition to the three main poles.
PACK 3 SIZE 5
«22aft
BBF
Contact Bank and screws
Specify colour code as
follows.
B   Brown
Y   Yellow
R   Red
G  Green
4NO - ONC
2NO - 2NC
ONO. - 4NC
3NO- 1NC
One B or Y may be used
as additional auxiliary
contacts for SIZE 10
Price each $5.00
PACK 4 SIZE 5
Dummy contact bank (BLACK)
See contact arrangement table.
Price Each $2.00
PACK 6 SIZE 5
Mechanical Latch Attachment.
Will operate with any
contact bank arrangement but not when a
timing attachment is
used. Released by independent built-in
solenoid. Advise coil
voltage and frequency,
(a-c only)
Price Each $14.00
Prices do not include sales tax and are subject to change without notice.
PACK 3 SIZE 10
Contact Bank, three pole
with one convertible
auxiliary contact.
Price each $14.00
PACK 5 SIZE 5
Pneumatic Timing Attachment
and spacer block.
On-delay or Off-delay
Time Range: 0.5 to 180 seconds.
Repeat Accuracy: Plus or Minus
10%
Contacts: Fine silver-single
pole double throw,
snap action.
Contact Rating:  10 amp-600
volt, same
polarity.
Price Each $27.00
PACK 7 SIZE 5
PACK 7 SIZE 10
Mechanically
interlocked
reversing
base plate.
Price Each $3.00
15/6/71
 @@l©r Electric
ighland, ISSSnois
MANUAL VOLTAGE CONTROL MODULE
Models MVC-104,  108, and 232
Part Numbers 90 37000 100,  102, and 103
Publication No,  90 37000 99X
Original Issue:   November 7, 1973
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Section 1. 0
Introduction
1.1
General
1.2
Purpose
1.3
Specifications
1.4
Operation
1.5
Installation
1.6
Interconnection
-2
-2
LIST OF TABLES/ILLUSTRATIONS
Table 1 Specifications
Figure 1 Overall Interconnection Diagram
Figure 2 Isolation Transformer Interconnection
Figure 3        Outline and Mounting Dimensions
Baslar Electric
Highland, HUnoJi
 SECTION 1. 0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
GENERAL
The Manual Voltage Control Module (MVC) consists of a three-position
switch, two fuses, a variable autotransformer, a full-wave rectifier bridge,
resistors, and capacitors.    These components are mounted within a metal case
capable of being door or panel mounted,
1.2
PURPOSE
The MVC is designed for use with the Basler SR line of voltage regulators in brushless exciter applications.   The MVC allows the generator voltage to
be controlled manually or automatically and provides a means for system voltage
shutdown.
1.3
SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 1 - SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Number
Part
Number
Applicable Voltage Regulator
^Nominal Input
(Single Phase)
Voltage   Frequency
Model              (VAC)      (Hz)
MVC Output Rating
Maximum    Continuous
DC Volts     DC Amps
MVC-104
i
90 37000 100
SR4A, SR4F      120          50/60
SR6A                    120           400
110                      7
110                     7
MVC-108
90 37000 102
SR8A,SR8F      240    ,      50/60     ,
SR9A                 240          400
220                     7
220                     7
MVC-232
90 37000 103
SR32A                60             50/60
50                        20
*See paragraph 1, 6 and Figure 2,
1. 4 OPERATION
'
The variable autotransformer and rectifier bridge cf the MVC supply
the variable DC power which provides the field current for the exciter in the manual
position.    The DC output from this variable supply at any one position is determined
by the exciter and generator parameters and load conditions.
1-1
Bonier Electric
Hiuhtand, Illinois
 GEN
SR    VOLTAGE  REGULATOR
ET
E2
E3
F +
A-
7
COQ_
E1 |E2fE3JF1 JF2T^T    [ F-|4 | 3 [2
_- i  i i i i i ,i    ii i i
/
MANUAL CONTROL MODULE
Ll
L2 L3
*.
24 23
-i >«
/I
-OL1
t\td&—OL2
 OL3
FIGURE 1  OVERALL INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
-ON
*For overall interconnection
see FIGURE 1
Isolation Transformer
o Ll
-o L2
«o L3
«o N
FIGURE 2  ISOLATION TRANSFORMER INTERCONNECTION
Basler Electric
Highland, Illinois
 1
IE
MVC - 104
MVC - 103
MVC - 232
'4
i7
.375 DIA. MTG. HOLES
4 PUCES
MANUAL
OFF  ^AUTOMATIC
VOLTAGE  CONTROL
MODE
MANUAL VOLTAGE ADJUST
INCREASE
(D
n\
e
e
J
12
<£
13-2-
J8
4
1
~$£B&
MVC
MVC
104
108
SWITCHBOARD
(PANEL OR DOOR)
3"
lb
PANEL
THICKNESS
7
1 MAX.
Q_L.MAX_.
d 8
MVC - 232
SWITCHBOARD
(PANEL OR DOOR)
1 MAX.
1 8
FIGURE 3 OUTLINE AND MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
 ,
Boslar EiQCtric
--gs
-Wl
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Models SR4 & SR8
(50/60 Hertz)
^s,
CONFIDENTIAL   INFOOUITIOH
OF BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY, HIGHLAND, ILL.
IT IS LOANED FOR CONFIDENTIAL USE. SUBJECT
TO RETURN ON REQUEST. AND SITH THE MUTUAL
UNDERSTANDING THAT IT IILL NOT BE USED IN
ANT MANNER DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF
BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY
Publication
Number:   17700 99Y
Date:   August 1971
 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains description, principles of operation, installation,
operation, maintenance and trouble shooting pertaining to Voltage Regulator,
Models SR4 and SR8, manufactured by Basler Electric Company.   Outline,
schematic and Interconnection Diagrams are included.
BASlf/f
V*-^ ///GM14H0, /IttMO/S
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
Section
1 Description    .  1
1. 1     General  1
1.2 Purpose     .     .     . ' .     ....     .     .     .     .     . 3
1.3 Application  3
1.4 Optional Features  3
1.5 Accessories  3
1.6 Model Number Description and Selection      ... 4
2 Principles of Operation  6
2. 1     Functional Circuits  6
2.2     Automatic Voltage Build Up  7
2. 3     Motor Starting or Short Circuit with
Brush Type Rotary Exciter  8
2. 4     Motor Starting or Short Circuit with Brushless
Rotary Exciter (or Static Exciter)  8
2. 5     Parallel Compensation(Droop or Cross-Current
Compensation)  8
3 Installation  11
3. 1     Mounting  11
3.2     Interconnection  11
4 Operation  16
4. 1    General  16
4.2 Operation at Reduced Speed  16
4.3 Voltage Shutdown  16
4.4 Adjustment  17
4.5 Wiring  17
4.6 Initial Operation  17
4.7 Field Flashing  19
,         4. 8 ,  Parallel Operation  20
5 Maintenance, Replacement Parts and Trouble Shooting   . 24
5.1 Preventive Maintenance  24
5.2 Corrective Maintenance  24
5.3 Replacement Parts  24
5. 4     Warranty and Repair Service  25
5.5     Trouble Shooting  26
6 Drawings  31
6. 1     General  31
^"-^ HlCNtAXO. UttHO'S
BASLfff,
l**0. Ut/HO/3
 SECTION 1
DESCRIPTION
1. 1 GENERAL
1.1.1        The SR voltage regulator consists of transformers, transistors,
thyristors (SCR's), silicon diodes, resistors and capacitors.    The regulators
contain no electrolytic capacitors, are not subject to wear from moving parts
and are relatively unaffected by temperature, humidity, vibration or shock.
TABLE 1-1 LEADING PARTICULARS
Manufacturer        Basler Electric Company
Model Number SR4 & SR8
Voltage Regulation  Less than ±1/2% Ave. Volt.
Response Time 16 Ms.
Voltage Adjust Range ±10% of Nom.Volt.
Ambient Operating Temp
3.5 Amps        -55°Cto+70°C
7.0 Amps        -55°Cto+50°C
Temperature Coefficient
(After 20 minutes warm-up)     •    •    . ±1/2% for 20°C Change
Power Dissipation (Max.) 60 Watts
Vibration Tested to withstand 5G's from 20 to 500 Cps
Mounting   . #   , # Designed to operate 'when mounted
on electric motors, gasoline,   diesel
or turbine driven generator systems
Parallel Compensation
(Terminals 1 & 2) 5A at 25 VA, Droop Adj. to 5%
Overall Dimension
Height  10-1/2 inches
Width  8-3/8 inches
Depth  5 inches
Weight 10 pounds
Finish Dark Brown Baking Enamel
BASlfR
V_>^~J7t«Mtm-*0. 011 l"OrS
 o
1.1.2 All components of the voltage regulator are mounted on a formed
sheet metal chassis.    7\; r -" "  .
1.2 PURPOSE
1.2.1        This unit regulates the generator voltage by controlling the current
it supplies to the generator or the exciter field.
1.3 APPLICATION
1.3.1 The regulator can be used on any generating system within its rating
This includes brush type rotary exciters, brushless rotary exciters or directly
into the generator field.   (See Table 1-2.)
1. 4 OPTIONAL FEATURES
1. 4.1 The optional features of the regulator are listed below.    They are
designated by a combination of letters and numbers in the complete model number.
(See Paragraph 1. 6.)
a.-Parallel compensation is controlled by either an internal
adjustable resistor or an external rheostat.
b. -Single or three-phase sensing with NEMA standard voltages.
c. -Internal or external voltage-adjust rheostat.
d. -Stabilizing networks for use with brush or brushless rotary
exciters or as a static exciter.
1.5 ACCESSORIES
1. 5.1 The accessories are not designated in the SR model number.    These
accessories when required, must be selected as a separate item.   The following list contains the accessories that are available.
a.-Power Transformers
b.-Paralleling Current Transformers
c. -Series Boost Options
d. -Underspeed-Overvoltage Control Modules
e. -Manual Voltage Control Modules
f . -SR Regulator with RFI Suppression
g. -Wide Range Voltage Adjust
h.-Volts-Per-Cycle Modules
i.-DC Generator Voltage Control
1. 5. 2        Information covering these accessories may be obtained by consulting
the applicable instruction manual or product bulletin or by contacting your
nearest Basler Electric Sales Representative or the factory, System Sales
Department direct.
BASlf/f
 »tf
■For use on
all brush type
exciter ap-
•a
c
co
c
O
.|H
-t->
al
CJ
• r-l
1 1
a.
CO
CO
CU
1—1
.fi
CO
g
CO
o
g
fi
o
CO
rH
O
-t->
• rrf
o
X
CU
CO
u
o
u
CU
c
CU
u
CU
>
o
XS
CU
as
rH
Be
W
o
UO
l-H
CO
ctJ
CU
CO
u
o
CU
-t->
•lH
CJ
X
w
o
• lH
-♦->
«J
CO
-For use with
brushless
exciters
(primarily on
generators
rated less than
150 K.W.)
<
m
W
-*->
•*->   l-H
*j
i
■*->
f—i     j_,
o     to
>   (D.2.
4->
+->
co
o
CD
fcuO
r—1
-t->
CO
•1—1
CO
o
CD
i—1
«J
fi
*H
CU
CU
fafi
l-H
CO
fi
••—5
CCf    CTJ
2 in
O    0
O .,3
CU
F-H   *r—»
CO
o
o
r-H
fi ^-^
S  o nj
53 rt *
rH
O   T3
fi
c
l-H
O T5
-fi   X
O T3
><:
i
fi
Sd^
tH
CM
CO
Tf
<D
TS
>
O
CJ
CU
y—V
Jh
0J
>
T3
T3
-i-i
i—i
U T3
o o
O
CU
fi
& U
|
CO
1
a
CU
<
CQ
TSJ.
is.
tH
CO
is isl. 1a. tsi. o.
o. isi. ta. 'o. is.
•Hi
TSLia.
rH  l-H  l—1
T-H
rH
CO
CO
CO
CO
CO
r-4 aT
r-l    OJ
r-l CO
•s        rs        •»        *v        «s
♦s        9\        #-,        m\        «n
> > > > >
o 3
33 7^
.3 w
>>
O 00 o
CO
o
O
oo
o
CD
o
o o
•H  CM  CM
•             It
l-H
CO
■
CM
tH
I
o
CM
|
CM
l-H
|
CO
I
i
1
o o
CO CO
1      1
sH  CM  CO
"*
lo
1
CD
t>
CO
OJ
o
i-i
CM
CO ^
OOO
o
o
O
o
o
o
rH
rH
rH
rH rH
•^  »—l
O   oj
1
xi
•lH
|
>>
i—i
CU
CO
<3
PQ
i       fi
c
a>
I
1
-«- o
i—I
o
1
CU
•T—i
f^
•—1    F-H
o
OJ ••-'
1—1 -IH
CU
l—l
I—1
•|H
CO
•1-1
>
as
I—4
CU
o
-l->
CO
.1—1
Jh
fi   r^H
0    CO
CU
-fi
1
r-v    ^    °
f-4
o
-M
CO
T3
CO
-M      rH
hD ctf
O   rt   Jh
Z a a
ccJ
tH
fi
•l—l
■f—i
0
Jh
^sa
fi •+■>
.fi   CO
tH
CM
CO
• "8
CJ   -M
rt   fi
I-1   ^
b o
& B
<
o
f—(
OJ -5 cs>
OJ  £*     1
cqph
1
t-^
I
1
00
m
BASICR
 G>
SECTION 2
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
2.1
FUNCTIONAL CIRCUITS
2.1.1      General (See Figure 2-1)
2.1.1.1 The voltage regulator senses the generator voltage, compares a
rectified sample of that voltage with a reference diode (zener) voltage and
supplies the field current required to maintain the predetermined ratio
between the generator voltage and the reference voltage.    This unit consists
of five basic circuits.    These are a sensing circuit, an error detector, an
error amplifier, a power controller and a stabilization network.   All of
these circuits, except the power controller and part of the sensing circuit,
are contained on an etched circuit board assembly.   (See Figure 6-2)
C
REF.
STABILIZATION
NETWORK
r^4
ERROR
DETECTOR
 (^
ERROR
AMPLIFIER
 $>
POWER
CONTROLLER
__.    d
GENERATOR
■   -—m —p*
i
i
T
SENSING
j&      \
CE
RCUI
T
•OUTPUT
FIGURE 2-1   OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
JSASlfP
 current path around the control rectifiers to allow the generator residual
voltage to be converted to DC by diodes CR13, CR14, CR15 and CR16 and
applied to the exciter field.   When the generator voltage reaches approximately 75% of rated, the relay pulls in, removing the conventional rectifiers,
thus allowing the control rectifiers to regulate the generator output voltage.
A minimum of 3% generator residual is required for automatic voltage build
up.   If less than 3%, external field flashing may be required.
2. 3 MOTOR STARTING OR SHORT CIRCUIT WITH BRUSH TYPE
ROTARY EXCITER
2. 3.1      When a heavy motor load or short circuit is applied to the generator,
the voltage decreases sharply.   If it decreases below (approximately) 50 percent of nominal, the relay drops out, connecting the exciter armature to the
exciter field, to allow self-excitation.   As the motor speed increases (or the
short circuit is removed), the generator output voltage increases.   When it
reaches (approximately) 75 percent of nominal, the relay pulls in, disconnecting the exciter armature, and the regulator resumes control of the generator
voltage.
2. 4 MOTOR STARTING OR SHORT CIRCUIT WITH BRUSHLESS ROTARY
EXCITER (OR STATIC EXCITER)
2. 4.1      In brushless exciters (or static exciter) applications, the exciter output is not available for self-excitation during heavy loading.    The addition of a
Series Boost Option (SBO), Patent No. 3, 316, 479, prevents collapse of excitation by providing constant voltage to the regulator for all operating conditions.
(See paragraph 1. 5)
2. 5 PARALLEL COMPENSATION
(DROOP OR CROSS-CURRENT COMPENSATION)
2. 5.1      When parallel operation is required, additional components are required in the regulating system.    These are resistor R25, transformer T3 and
a current transformer CT1.   Two of the components are included in a parallel
equipped voltage regulator.    These are R25 and T3.    Current transformer CT1
is a separate item and must be interconnected as shown in Figures 6-5 or 6-6.
i »
2. 5. 2 These components allow the paralleled generators to share reactive
load and reduce circulating reactive currents between them. This is accomplished in the following manner.
2. 5. 3      A current transformer CT1 is installed in line 2 of each generator.
It develops a signal that is proportional in amplitude and phase to the line current.    This current signal develops a voltage across resistor R25.   A slider
on R25 supplies a part oi this voltage to the primary of transformer T3.   The
secondaries of T3 are connected in series with the leads from the secondary
'iGMukxa m/xots
 of the sensing transformer TI, and the sensing rectifiers located on the printed
^ircuit board.    The AC voltage applied to the sensing rectifier bridge is the
^Vector sum of the stepped down sensing voltage (terminals El and E3) and the
parallel CT signal supplied through T3 (terminals 1 and 2).    The voltage supplied
to the sensing rectifiers by the parallel CT is very small in relation to the signal
supplied by the sensing voltage.   The regulator input sensing voltage (terminals
El and E3) and the parallel compensation signal (terminals 1 and 2) must be
connected to the generator system so as to provide the correct phase and polarity
relationship.
2. 5. 4     When a resistive load (unity P. F.) load is applied to the generator,
the voltage that appears across R25 (and T3 windings), leads the sensing voltage
by 90 degrees, and the vector sum of the two voltages is nearly the same as the
original sensing voltage; consequently, almost no change occurs in generator
output voltage. ,
2. 5. 5      When a lagging power (inductive) load is applied to the generator, the
voltage across R25 becomes more in phase with the sensing voltage and the
combined vectors of the two voltages results in a larger voltage being applied
to the sensing rectifiers.   Since the action of the regulator is to maintain a constant voltage at the sensing rectifiers, the regulator reacts by decreasing the
generator output voltage.
2. 5. 6     When a leading power factor (capacitive) load is applied to the generator,
^}e voltage across R25 becomes out of phase with the sensing voltage and the
combined vectors of the two voltages results in a smaller voltage being applied
to the sensing rectifiers.    Then the regulator reacts by increasing the generator
voltage.
2. 5. 7      When two generators are operating in parallel, if the field excitation
on one generator should become excessive and cause a circulating current to
flow between generators, this current will appear as a lagging power factor
(inductive) load to the generator with excessive field current and a leading power
factor (capacitive) load to the other.    The parallel compensation circuit will
cause the voltage regulator to decrease the field excitation on the generator
with the lagging power factor load, and increase the field excitation.on the generator with the leading power factor load, so as to minimize the circulating
currents between the generators.
2. 5. 8      This action and circuitry is called parallel droop compensation.   It
allows two or more paralleled generators to proportionally share inductive
loads by causing a decrease or droop in the generator system voltage.
2. 5. 9      Parallel cross-current compensation allows two or more paralleled
generators to share inductive reactive loads with no decrease or droop in the
generator system output voltage.    This is accomplished by the action and cir-
(^titry described previously for parallel droop compensation, and the addition
)
;
BASlffi
^-^ MlGtttM.O. IHIMQtS
 of cross connecting leads between the parallel CT secondaries as shown in
Figure 3-1.   By connecting the finish of one parallel CT to the start of another,
a closed series loop is formed, which interconnects the CT's of all generators
to be paralleled.   The signals from the interconnected CT's cancel each other
when the line currents are proportional and in phase.   No system voltage
decrease occurs.   These regulators provide the necessary circuit isolation so
that parallel cross-current compensation can be used.
^~*^ UlGHl.HO. Ill /*0'S
 SECTION 3
INSTALLATION
3.1 MOUNTING
3.1.1      The voltage regulator can be mounted in any position without affecting
its operating characteristics; however, the unit should be vertically mounted
to obtain optimum cooling.    The regulator can be mounted in any location where
the ambient temperature does not exceed its ambient operational limits (see
Table 1-1).   Due to its rugged construction, the regulator can be mounted
directly on the generator.    The overall and mounting dimensions are shown in
Figure 6-1.
3.2 INTERCONNECTION
CAUTION
MEGGERS AND HIGH POTENTIAL TEST
EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE USED.
INCORRECT USE OF SUCH EQUIPMENT
WILL DESTROY THE SEMICONDUCTORS
IN THE REGULATOR.
3.2.1      General
3.2. 1.1 The regulator must be connected to the generator system as instructed
in this section and as shown in the basic interconnection diagrams (Figures
6-5 and 6-6).   Number 16 gauge wire (or larger) should be used for all connections to the regulator.
3. 2. 2      Regulator Sensing (Terminals El, E2 and E3)
i ■     i
3. 2. 2.1  The regulator has an internal sensing transformer(s) Tl (T2) provided
with taps for input sensing voltages of 120, 208, 240, 416, 480 and 600 VAC.
The model number of the unit designates the sensing voltage and also, if it is
equipped for single (Tl) or three phase (Tl and T2) sensing.    (See Table 1-2)
For operation with generator voltages above 600, a potential transformer(s)
must be used to supply the regulator sensing voltage.    This transformer should
be of metering quality.    The regulator sensing circuit load is less than 10 VA
and correct polarity must be maintained to the regulator sensing input.
3. 2. 2. 2 On single phase sensing models, the voltage sensing leads are connected to terminals El and E3.    For three phase sensing, terminals El, E2
and E3 are used.   For precise voltage regulation, the sensing leads should
be connected as close as possible to the point where regulation is desired.
BASLFR^  /-?, +. S> 11
^-7 JjlGML4*tt*. tllt*OZS
 The regulator regulates the voltage that is applied to its sensing terminals.
Therefore, it cannot correct for voltage drop in leads that may occur at
points other than where the regulator sensing leads are connected.   The leads
that supply regulator sensing should not be used to supply power to any other
^\[uipment or to the regulator power stage (terminals 3 and 4).
3. 2.2.3 If the generator is to be operated in parallel with other generators,
the phase relationship of sensing voltage and the parallel current transformer
is very important.   (See paragraph 3.2.6 for further information.)
)
3. 2.3      Field Power (Terminals F+ and F-)
3.2.3.1 The model number prefix (SR4 and SR8) of the regulator, defines the
amount of power the unit is capable of delivering (See Table 1-2.).
3. 2.3. 2 The DC resistance of the field to which the regulator is connected (terminals F+ and F-) must be equal to, or greater than, 9 ohms for an SR4 and
18 ohms for an SR8.   If the resistance is less than the specified minimum, a
resistor must be added in series with the field.   This resistor value plus the
field resistance, must exceed the minimum preceding values.
3.2.3.3 Good generator voltage stability usually results when the regulator
output Is above 20 VDC at no load.   Should the voltage be less and a voltage
stability problem exists, it may be necessary to add resistance in series
with the field.   This resistance raises the regulator output voltage, thereby
increasing the stability signal.
J.2.3. 4 When adding resistance in series with the field, the resistor value
must not restrict field forcing during full load conditions.   The following
example explains how to compute the proper resistance:
a.-An SR4 voltage regulator is required to operate into an exciter
field that has a DC resistance of 4 ohms and current requirement
of 2.5 ADC at no load and 6 ADC at full load.   Since the SR4 requires a minimum field resistance of 9 ohms, a resistor of at least
5 ohms must be connected in series with the field.   The regulator
output will be'9 ohms times 2. 5 amp or 22 1/2 VDC at no load, and
9 ohms times 6 amp or 54 VDC at full load.    This conforms to the
10 volt minimum at no load and provides a sufficient amount of forcing
at full load (up to 90 VDC).
3.2.4     Interconnecting Regulator with Brush Type Rotary Exciters
3. 2. 4.1 When making connections on brush type rotary exciter applications, it
is very important to observe the polarities of the exciter field, exciter output
)
"a
)
BAStfR
 and the generator field as shown in Figure 6-5.   If these polarities are not
known, the system should be operated on manual voltage control and the polarities accurately determined, before connecting the voltage regulator into
the system.    The voltage regulator could be damaged if interconnection is
attempted before this data is known.
3. 2. 4. 2 When manual voltage control is desired on brush type exciter applications, a MANUAL-OFF-AUTO switch and a field rheostat are used.   (See
Figure 6-5.)    When this feature is not desired, the output of the exciter can be
connected directly to the regulator (terminal A-), to allow self-excitation
during short-circuit or overloads.
3. 2. 5      Input Power (Terminals 3 and 4)
3. 2. 5. 1 The model number prefix (SR4 or SR8) of the regulator defines the
maximum input power requirements.   (See Table 1-2.)   The current requirement of the field, to which the regulator is operating into, will determine the
actual input current.    The nominal voltage applied to the regulator input power
stage (terminals 3 and 4) must be 120V for the SR4 and either 208 or 240V for
the SR8.    The input power may be taken from any generator lines that provide
the correct voltage (line to line or line to neutral).   The phase relationship of
this input in relation to other circuits is not important.
3. 2. 5. 2 When the generator output voltage is different than the preceding values,
a power transformer must be used to match the generator voltage to the regulator input.   If excessive voltage is applied to the regulator input (terminals 3
and 4), the diodes and SCR's in the power controller circuit may be destroyed.
3. 2. 5. 3 If the field or field flashing circuit is grounded, a power transformer
must be used to isolate the regulator input from ground.   Without the use of
this transformer, a ground at any point in the field circuit and another ground
in the generator output, will destroy the SCR bridge.
3. 2. 5. 4 On single phase sensing models, it is recommended that the input
power be taken from a phase other than the one used for input sensing.
i i
3. 2. 6     Parallel Compensation (Terminals 1 and 2)
3. 2. 6.1 When it is required to operate the regulator in parallel, first verify
the model number to insure the unit is equipped with parallel provisions (See
Table 1-4.).
3. 2. 6. 2 In addition to the regulator provisions, a 25 VA current transformer
(CT) is required (See Figures 6-5 and 6-6.). This CT is connected in a generator line and should deliver from 3 to 5 amps secondary current at rated load.
I
BASifR
13
 3. 2. 6. 3     The phase relationship of CT signal to the regulator sensing voltage
must be correct or the systems will not parallel properly.   On three phase
sensing models the CT must be installed in the line that supplies sensing voltage
to regulator terminal E2.   For single phase models it must be installed in the
line that does not supply sensing to the regulator.
)
3. 2. 6. 4     Figures 6-5 and 6-6 show the correct CT polarity for L1-L2-L3 phase
rotation.   If the phase sequence   is L1-L3-L2, the CT's secondary leads must
be interchanged.    The correct CT secondary polarity can be determined by the
test outlined in paragraph 4. 8. 3.
3. 2. 6. 5     For droop compensation connect the CT to its respective regulator as
shown on pages 36 and 37.   For cross-current compensation, connect each CT
to its respective regulator.    Then connect the finish of the first CT to the start
of the second CT, the finish of the second CT to the start of the third CT, etc.
Continue until all CT's are connected in series.    The final step will be to connect
the finish of the last CT to the start of the first CT.   (See Figure 3-1)
3. 2. 6. 6     A unit-parallel switch shorts the parallel CT secondary to prevent any
droop signal from being injected into the regulating system during single unit
operation.    The switch may not be required on parallel droop compensation
applications where a voltage drop is not objectionable.
3. 2. 6. 7    On parallel cross-current compensation applications consisting of more
than two generators, a unit-parallel switch should be used if all the generators
are not always on the load bus.   If the switch is not used, a voltage droop will be
introduced into the system.    This is due to the unloaded generator parallel CT
not supplying its compensating signal, but allowing a voltage drop to occur across
it.   This drop will also cause the voltage of the incoming generator to fluctuate
prior to paralleling.    Ideally, this switch is an auxiliary on the circuit breaker
contactor that opens when the circuit breaker is closed.
14
BASlfR
Gmpamu
Illt + OlS
 Regulator #1
E.
4hO
D"0-0
CT
E,
E.
<r-0^0-<>
Regulator #2
1
\m
E.
E,
E.
O,
Regulator # .... n
<K?
<?
D^CH'
E
E
E
NOTE
When more than 3
generators are to be
paralleled, continue
connections as shown.
Figure 3-1  Cross-Current Compensation CT's Interconnection
15
Easier Electric
' HghtMKl,Mnott
 SECTION 4
OPERATION
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1 The initial operating procedures are outlined in paragraphs 4. 6
through 4. 7. The following procedures should be reviewed before initial
operation is attempted.
4.2
OPERATION AT REDUCED SPEEDS
CAUTION
DO NOT OPERATE THE GENERATING SYSTEM
AT REDUCED SPEEDS FOR AN EXTENDED
PERIOD OF TIME WITH THE VOLTAGE REGULATOR IN OPERATION.
4. 2.1      Prolonged operation at speeds lower than normal can cause complete
destruction of the voltage regulator and/or exciter field.   If operation at
reduced speed is essential, input power should be removed from the regulator
or an UFOV module should be added to the system.   (See paragraph 1. 5)
4.3
VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
4. 3.1      The regulator may be equipped with a switch to allow removal of
excitation from the field in an emergency or when the generator prime mover
must be operated at reduced speed.   (See Figure 6-6)  If this switch is not
used, it is recommended it be temporarily installed for initial operation.
4.3.2     When used, this switch must always be installed in the input power
line to the regulator (terminal 3 or 4).   A high flyback voltage will develop
if this switch is installed in the field circuit (terminal F+ or F-).
CAUTION
TO AVOID HIGH VOLTAGE ARCING,  THE
FIELD CIRCUIT MUST NEVER BE OPENED
DURING OPERATION AND A SHUTDOWN
CIRCUIT USING FIELD DISCHARGE RESISTORS IS NOT REQUIRED AND SHOULD NOT
BE USED.
(S^\ >   UciiieLimt
®F&
16
ressr
GMIMHO, tUtHOIS
 4.4 ADJUSTMENTS
4. 4.1      The adjustments pertaining to the regulator and system operation are \
described in the following paragraphs.    These adjustments are made during /
initial operation and normally do not have to be repeated during the life of the
regulator.
4. 4. 2      Stability Adjustment R4
4. 4. 2.1 This adjustment provides for stable regulating operation.   It controls
the amount of feedback that is applied to the error amplifier stage.   Normally
it is factory set in the extreme clockwise (CW) position.   This setting normally
assures good stability, but tends to slow the response time of the generator.
If rotated counterclockwise (CCW), the system response time becomes faster.
However, if rotated too far CCW, the generator voltage may oscillate (hunt).
It should then be rotated CW well above the point where oscillating occurs.   The
system voltage stability is very critical at no load.   If a setting is desired that
provides the fastest possible voltage response with good generator stability, an
oscilloscope or some voltage recording device should be used.
4. 4. 3      Generator Voltage Adjust Rheostat Rl
4. 4. 3.1 This adjustment is provided to control the generator voltage.   When
adjusted to its maximum resistance position (CCW), minimum generator voltage
is obtained.   Maximum generator voltage is obtained with minimum resistance v
Q (CW). )
4. 4. 4      Nominal Voltage Range Set Adjust R3
4. 4. 4.1 This adjustment is provided to vary the limits of Rl.   Normally R3 is
set to provide Rl with an adjustment range of ±10% of rated.
4.5 WIRING
4. 5. 1       Before initial operation is attempted, verify the regulator is connected
for the applicable application as shown in either Figure 6-5 or 6-6.
4. 6 INITIAL OPERATION
4. 6. 1      The initial operating instructions are contained in the following paragraphs.    These procedures should be completely reviewed and understood,
before system operation is attempted.   Also, locating controls and adjustments
pertinent to system operation would be beneficial.
4. 6. 2      Single Unit Operation (No Load)
a.    Start the prime mover and bring up to rated speed.   If a voltage .
shutdown switch is used (see paragraph 4. 3), close switch to apply )
17
UlC'.'LAHO    ILL t*OtS
 excitation.   When this switch is not used, generator voltage will
build up automatically.   (Field flashing may be necessary, see
paragraph 4. 7.)
b. Verify generator voltage.   (Any of the following conditions
may occur.)
(1) Overvoltage (+15% or more) - If this condition occurs,
open the shutdown switch immediately and/or stop the prime
mover.   Determine the cause of overvoltage.   If necessary,
refer to trouble shooting procedure.
(2) No Voltage Build Up - If this condition exists, field flashing may be required, refer to paragraph 4. 7.
(3) Undervoltage (-15% or more) - If this condition exists,
stop the prime mover and determine the cause of undervoltage.
If necessary, refer to trouble shooting procedure.
(4) Voltage Builds Up and Collapses - If this condition exists,
stop the prime mover and determine the cause of collapse. If
necessary, refer to trouble shooting procedure.
(5) Oscillating Voltage (Hunting) - If this condition exists,
refer to the trouble shooting procedures. (Voltage hunting
can be caused by an unstable prime mover.)
c. If the voltage is unstable, perform the following steps:
(1) Loosen the locking nut on R4.
(2) Rotate R4 clockwise (CW) approximately 30° beyond the
point that stable operation is obtained.    (If stability cannot be
obtained by performing these steps,  see paragraph 3. 2. 3.)
(3) Tighten lock nut on R4.
d. To adjust the voltage range for ±10%, verify Rl is adjusted to
the center of its travel and perform the following steps:
(1) Loosen the locking nut on R3 and adjust to obtain the rated
generator voltage.
(2) Tighten lock nut on R3.
e. The voltage regulator is now ready for load test.
I
^—'' ff/GML AXD.  IL l/*0/3
BASlfR,
UlCULAXD. ULIMOli
18
 f. Apply load to generator.
g. Verify the voltage regulation is within ±1/2%.   If it is not within )
these limits, refer to the trouble shooting procedures.
h.   Alternately remove and apply load to determine if the generator
voltage is stable.
i. If the generator voltage becomes unstable, adjust R4 for stable
operation. (When stability cannot be obtained by performing these
steps, see paragraph 4. 6. 3.)
4. 6. 3      Instability may occur when the no load field requirements of the exciter
or generator is near the minimum working voltage of the regulator.   Increased
stability may be obtained by adding a resistor in series with the field.   (See
paragraph 3. 2. 3.)
NOTE
Unstable governors are frequently the cause
of generator voltage instability.   If a stability
problem still exists after performing the procedure in paragraph 4. 6. 2, steps f and g and
4. 6. 3, a thorough check of the governor should
be made. \
4.7 FIELD FLASHING
4.7.1      The following procedure is for use on systems where the generator
voltage does not build up and no field flash provisions are incorporated.   (There
is usually sufficient residual magnetism to allow the generator voltage to build
up without additional flashing circuit.   See paragraph 2. 2)
4.7. 2     With the prime mover at rest (not rotating) apply a DC flashing source
across terminals F+ and A- on the regulator.   The positive of the flashing
source must be connected to F+ and negative to A-.
—- ' " —      i i
CAUTION
THE FLASHING SOURCE CANNOT BE GROUNDED
UNLESS A POWER ISOLATION TRANFORMER IS
USED.
4.7. 3     When automatic field flashing is required, a DC cource not in excess of
125V should be used and the circuit must be interconnected as shown in Figure 6-6.
A blocking diode in series with the regulator A- terminal prevents the regulator
output from flowing into the flashing source. \
19 BASlfR
^-^ JJtGMl**D    fLt/MOIS
 4. 8 PARALLEL OPERATION
4. 8.1      Introduction
4. 8.1.1 The following paragraphs describe the procedures to be followed to
operate two or more generator sets in parallel.
4. 8.1. 2 In order to insure proper parallel operation, the following requirements must be met:
a. The voltage regulating systems must cause the generators to
share the total KVAR load.
b. The speed governing system must make the generators share
the total KW load.
4. 8. 2      Preliminary Instructions
4. 8. 2.1 It is recommended, before proceeding, that the operation of the components in (and external to) the regulator which facilitate parallel operation
be reviewed (paragraph 2. 5).
4. 8. 2.2 It is essential that the paralleling signal at terminals 1 and 2 of the
regulator, have the proper phase relationship with that of the sensing voltages
at terminals El, E2 (if used), and E3.   Verify the connections to these terminals are made exactly as shown in Figures 6-5 and 6-6.   If cross-current
compensation is desired, the paralleling CT's must be connected as described
in paragraph 2. 5. 4.   A CT must be selected which will furnish 3 to 5 amps at
rated generator load current.
4. 8. 2.3 Prior to operation, the slide adjustment of resistor R25 (on all regulators) should be set to identical positions, near the end of R25 (fartherest
from the terminal strip).   This adjustment will provide maximum droop signal.
4. 8. 3   ,   Preliminary Operation
4. 8. 3.1 Before attempting to parallel two or more generator,sets, it is recommended individual sets be tested to verify that the paralleling features, function
properly.    The foUowing test may be used:
a. Place each set in operation in accordance with paragraph 4. 6. 2.
b. Verify the paralleling CT secondary is not shorted.   (Unit-
parallel switch in PARALLEL position.)
c. Apply 25 to 100% unity power factor load to the set under test.
Generator voltage should change less than 1% and the frequency
should decrease if the governor is set for droop operation.
20
rfc\ £  UotucCtHmpaa*
 )
d. Apply a 25 to 100% 0. 8 P. F. (inductive) load; voltage should
droop from 4 to 6% with rated load. If the voltage rises instead
of drooping, reverse the CT sensing leads.
4. 8.3. 2 During these tests, verify the voltage and speed do not drift or jump
erratically.   Also, the generator voltage sequence can be verified at this time.
4. 8.3.3 When the preceding test has been satisfactorily completed, the sets
should parallel properly.
4. 8. 4      Conditions Necessary for Paralleling
4. 8. 4.1 In order to prevent damage to the generator and/or prime mover,
paralleling should be attempted only when the speeds (frequencies) are equal,
and at the instant when the generator voltages are equal.   That is, they have
the same phase sequence of voltage and the voltages are in phase.
4. 8. 5      Metering
4. 8. 5.1 In order to initiate paralleling and to check for proper parallel operation,
all generators should be equipped with the following monitoring equipment:
a. AC Voltmeter (1 or 2)
b. Frequency Meter (1 or 2) J
c. Synchroscope or a set of lights, etc. (indicates an in-phase
condition)
d. AC Ammeter (1 per set)
e. KW Meter (1 per set)
f. KVAR or Power Factor Meter (1 per set)
i '     i
g. Field Current Ammeters ,
4. 8. 6      Sequence of Operation (Parallel)
4. 8. 6.1 The following instructions contain the proper procedures to be followed for paralleling generators.   These procedures should be completely
reviewed and understood, before paralleling is attempted.
a. Start generator set No. 1
b. Close the circuit breaker connecting it to the bus.
)
21 $BffLc Ff^^l^P*"?
V-P"^ JJtmMLAHm   tlAtartttM
 c. Adjust its voltage and frequency to nominal.
d. Apply the load.   (If possible, load should be 10% or more of its
KW rating.)
e. Start generator set No. 2.
f. Adjust its voltage to nominal.
g. Adjust its speed slightly higher than that of No. l's.
h.     Observing the synchroscope (or lights), close the circuit breaker
(No. 2), when the set is in phase with No. 1.
i.     Immediately after closing the breaker, verify the indication on
the ammeter for set No. 2.    They should read well within the rating
of the generator.   If they do not, shut down the system and refer to
the trouble shooting table 5-2.   If unstable operation is indicated, see
paragraph 4. 8. 6. 3.   If stable, see next step.
j.     Adjust the speed of No. 2 to the point where each set is carrying
the desired share of KW load.
k.    Adjust the voltage of No. 2 until the ammeter readings, of both
sets, are near minimum.
1.     If KVAR or power factor meters are available, adjust voltage
adjust rheostat for equal or proportional KVAR or power factor
readings.
m.   If the sets are equipped with power factor meters instead of KW
meters, alternately adjust the speed and voltage on No. 2 until the
ammeter readings are proportional and the power factor readings
,  are equal.
NOTE
To obtain the best results, final adjustments
should be made with full load on the bus.
n.    With full load applied, readjust the speed and voltage on No. 2
until the desired load division is obtained.
4. 8. 6. 2 The best adjustment is obtained when both sets are supplying the
same percent of rated current, the KW (or power factor) readings are equal,
or the sum of the ammeter currents of the two sets, is minimum.
I
22
BASIFR^ (p. y. p
^~-y JJlCK-LAtO.  tlt/VO/S
 •
4. 8. 6. 3   Upon closing the circuit breaker for set No. 2 (paragraph 4. 8. 6. 1, h.)
improper operation may result.    This condition may be accompanied by a very
high ammeter reading, the circuit breaker may open, due to current overload, \
or it may be opened by the reverse power relay.   In order to isolate this problem
to the faulty speed or voltage regulating system, perform the following steps:
a. Parallel the generators as instructed in paragraph 4. 8. 6.1,
steps a through h.
b. Immediately after closing the circuit breaker, observe the KW
or power factor meters.    The following conditions may occur:
(1) A high ammeter reading accompanied by a large KW
unbalance.   When this condition exists, the speed regulating
system is faulty.
(2) A high ammeter reading accompanied by a KVAR unbalance.
When the condition exists, the voltage regulating system is
faulty.
4. 8. 6. 4  Another method of isolating the preceding trouble is to parallel the
generators using manual voltage control (if available).   If proper operation
is not obtained, the speed regulating system is at fault.   When proper operation is obtained, the voltage regulating system is at fault.
4. 8. 6. 5  If the trouble is isolated to the voltage regulator, verify the wiring /
and review paragraph 3. 2. 6, before removing the regulator from the system.
It will be found the great majority of problems encountered with the voltage
regulator, when attempting parallel operation, will be improper wiring.
4. 8. 7       The procedure shown for paralleling generator set No. 2 should be
followed for all additional sets to be paralleled.
)
23 BASlfR^  (p,+.S>
^—"^ JfiGMlAfO. tlttxOli.
L
 SECTION 5
MAINTENANCE, REPLACEMENT PARTS
AND TROUBLE SHOOTING
5.1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
5.1.1      Periodic inspection should be made on this unit to insure it is kept
clean and free from dirt and moisture.   Also, it is recommended the connections between the regulator and the system be checked and tightened at
this time.
5.2
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5. 2.1      Repairs to the regulator can be made following the diagrams in
Section 6.   Due to a protective transparent conformal coating, repair on the
printed circuit board is difficult and should not be attempted.   Basler maintains stock on replacement regulators and they are available within two working days (see Warranty, para. 5. 4).
5.3
REPLACEMENT PARTS
5. 3.1      The following table contains only those parts and assemblies which
are maintenance significant.   When ordering replacement parts, always
specify the complete model number (such as SR4A2B02B3E) and serial number
of the unit.
BASIFR
^—S^J/,GMt*»ia. /it f*o/S
24
 TABLE 5-1
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
yFig. 6-2
Legend No.    Parts Description
*Etched Circuit Board Assembly (CB1)
Basler
Part Number
(SR4)
Used on
SR	
5.4
3
4
5
6
7
8
*See Table 1-4 for Model No. and also state
WARRANTY AND REPAIR SERVICE
Basler
Part Number
(SR8)
Used on
SR 	
Silicon Controlled Rectifier
and CR12)
(CR11
06899
(2N688)
(or equiv.)
02625
(2N692)
(or equiv.)
Diode (CR8, CR9, CR13, CR14,
CR15, andCR16)
02689
(1N1204R)
(or equiv.)
02677
(1N3671AR)
(or equiv.)
Transformer (T3)
BE 09024 001
BE 09024 001
*Sensing Transformer(s)
Used on
SR	
Used on
SR—	
Filter Choke (Ll)
BE 08794 003
BE 08794 003
Relay (Kl)
02686
02686
R25 (Paralleling Rheostat)
02662
02662
Rl (See Figure 6-7)
03456
03456
serial number of unit.
5. 4. 1 Basler SR4 and SR8 are warranted against defective material and workman
ship for one year from the date of initial shipment.    Units submitted for warranty repair should be returned to the factory in Highland, Illinois, freight prepaid, with complete description of the installation (See Attachment A) and the reported troubles.   Pre-
arrangement with either the nearest Basler Sales Office or the Factory will assure the
fastest possible turn around time.
5. 4. 2 Out-of-warranty units should also be returned, freight prepaid, to the
factory in Highland, Illinois.   Repairs to regulators are made at a nominal charge,
unless the unit is so extensively damaged that complete replacement is required.
)
)
25
Basler Electric
Highland, Illinois
 5.5
TROUBLE SHOOTING
5. 5.1      The more common generator system malfunctions and the appropriate
repair procedure are listed in Table 5-2.
TABLE 5-2 - TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
Voltage does not
build up to rated
value.
i          •     i
Low residual or incorrect
polarity relationship between
exciter output and generator
field.
Field flashing is
required.
Voltage shutdown switch
open.
Close switch.
Prime mover not up to
rated speed.
Adjust speed to rated.
No or improper voltage to
input power terminals 3&4.
Verify wiring.
No connections to F+, F-
and A-.
Verify wiring.
Generator output   shorted
or heavily loaded.
Remove load or short.
Rl wired incorrectly.
Verify wiring.
Defective regulator.
i
Check SCR bridge,
faulty PC board, flashing diode, relay or
replace regulator.
Defective or improperly
wired exciter.
Verify exciter operation or connections.
I
BASlfR
^~y 7/iOHtA\D    til t*OtS
26
 i
TABLE 5-2 - TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART (continued)
)
•
•
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
Voltage build up
until relay actuates,
then decays.
Open in voltage adjust rheostat Rl or associated
circuitry.
Repair open connections
or replace rheostat.
No power input to terminals
3 & 4.  (Brush type rotary
exciter only. )
Verify wiring.
No firing pulse applied to
SCR gate.
Replace PC board.
CR11 and CR12 defective.
Replace defective SCR.
Voltage high,
uncontrollable
with voltage
adjust rheostat.
i          ■     i
No sensing voltage,
terminals El, E2 and E3.
Verify wiring.
Transfer switch in MANUAL
position (when used).
Place in AUTO.
External line voltage adjust
rheostat shorted.
Verify wiring.
)
Sensing transformer set to
wrong voltage tap.
Verify model number
of regulator.
Faulty relay (Kl).
Replace.
Faulty PC Board.
Replace regulator.
SCR's faulty.
Replace SCR's or
regulator.
Voltage high,
controllable with
voltage adjust
rheostat.
I
Sensing transformer set
to wrong voltage tap.
Verify model number
of regulator.
Voltage range adjust (R3)
set too high.
Adjust
Line voltage adjust (Rl)
resistance too low.
Increase resistance.
•
27
 "            J/tGtttAMO. tLLtNOtS
)
 TABLE 5-2   -   TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART (continued)
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
Voltage high,
controllable with
voltage adjust
rheostat (continued).
Improper connection of
sensing leads to generator.
Verify wiring.
Voltmeter inaccurate.
Verify operation or
replace.
Faulty PC board.
Replace regulator.
Voltage low,
controllable with
voltage adjust
rheostat.
R3 set too low.
Adjust
Prime mover not up to
rated speed.
Increase speed.
Improper connections of
sensing leads to generator.
Verify wiring.
Voltmeter inaccurate.
Verify operation or
replace.
Poor regulation.
i          .     i
Exciter or generator field
voltage requirements at
full load in excess of maximum regulator output
capability.
If regulator application is beyond the
limits specified in
Table 1-2, consult
Basler Electric for
available regulators.
Voltage at terminals 3 and
4 of regulators too low at
nominal generator voltage.
Input voltage to the
power stage should
be 120V for the SR4,
208V or 240V for the
SR8.
Output voltmeter at different location than regulator
sensing (voltage drop in
leads or wrong phase.
Connect voltmeter at
same point as regulator sensing.
Waveform distortion due to
harmonic content in generator voltage.   (Regulator
senses average voltage;
meter may be indicating
RMS values.
(Consult generator
manufacturer.)
BASUR
<g^ JFlt£beOM>gemf
^~-yJ/iCMt.Aro. /it/.tort
28
 TABLE 5-2 - TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART (continued)
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
Poor regulation,
(continued)
Unit-parallel switch in
PARALLEL position.
Place switch in UNIT
position, except during
parallel operation.
(Terminals 1 & 2
shorted.)
Unit-parallel switch faulty.
Replace.
Unbalanced load with three
phase sensing.
(Unit averages all three
phase voltages.)
Prime mover not up to
rated speed.
Bri ng up to rated.
Fault in exciter or generator.
Verify operation.
Faulty PC board.
Replace regulator.
Faulty SCR's or diodes.
Replace faulty
component.
Poor voltage
stability.
i          •     i
Frequency unstable.
Consult governor manual.
Voltage fluctuates to point
where Kl energizes or
de-energizes.
See symptom "Voltage
builds up, until relay
actuates, then decays. "
R4 maladjusted.
Adjust to proper setting.
No-load field voltage
below rated.
See paragraph 3. 2. 3.
Fault in exciter or generator.
Verify exciter or generator operation.
Faulty PC board or
defective SCR's.
Replace regulator.
Voltage recovery
slow with load
change.
R4 maladjusted.
Adjust (See paragraph
4. 4. 2.)
Low regulator forcing
capability.
Improper application of
regulator. (See Section 3)
29
BAS/fR
'       S-'       S3
4fofF™*£L»2£!&
  (JiGMtAHD. tlltMOtS
 TABLE 5-2 - TROUBLE SHOOTING CHART (continued)
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
Voltage recovery
slow with load
change,
(continued)
Wrong stabilizing network.
Verify model number.
(See Table 1-4)
Slow prime mover response.
Consult governor
manual.
Parallel generators
do not divide real
(KW) load equally.
Improper setting of power
sensing of governor.
Consult governor
manufacturer.
No droop compensation can be
obtained for
parallel generators.
Tap on R25 set to minimum
droop position.
Adjust R25 to obtain
required droop.  (See
paragraph 4. 8. 2. 3.)
Parallel CT does not supply
the required 3 to 5 amp
secondary current.
See paragraph 3. 2. 6.
Parallel generator
do not divide reactive KVAR load
equally.  (Circulating reactive current between
generators.
1                           '             T
Terminals 1 & 2 of regulator shorted by UNIT-
PARALLEL switch.
Place switch in
PARALLEL position.
Tap on R25 set too low
droop position.
Adjust for increase
droop.
Parallel CT does not supply the required 3 to 5
amps secondary current.
Replace with proper
CT (see paragraph
4. 8. 2. 3).
Paralleling CT's polarity
reversed.
Interchange CT
secondary leads.
Paralleling CT not in
correct generator line.    '
Verify wiring.  (See
Figures   6-5 or 6-6)
BASIFR
' S*A S3
X—^ H/GftlAHO. ILHAtOlS
30
 SECTION 6
DRAWINGS
6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1      This section contains drawings and diagrams to facilitate the installation, operation and maintenance of the voltage regulator.
a. Figure 6-1, Outline Drawing (SR4 and SR8)
b. Figure 6-2,   Component Location anS Identification (SR4 and SR8)
c. Figure 6-3, Schematic Diagram (SR4 and SR8)
d. Figure 6-4, Wiring Diagram (SR4 and SR8)
V
e. Figure 6-5, Interconnection - Brush Type Rotary Exciter
f. Figure 6-6, Interconnection - Brushless Rotary Exciter
(or Static Exciter)
g. Figure 6-7, Outline Drawing - Voltage Adjust Rheostat
(P/N 03456)
h.   Figure 6-8, Outline Drawing - Paralleling Rheostat
(P/N 03469)
I
V->^~ifft9MlAMB, tilIMfO/t
i
 45
64
©•
8
J3
32
5-
©
0
M
32
i    i
10 ii
265 DIA.
4   MTG. HOLES
AIR
FLOW
FIGURE 6-1    OUTLINE DRAWING (SR4 and SR8)
32
Ba«l«r Electric
Highland, Knott
 1 - ETCHED CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY
2 - SILICON CONTROLLED RECTIFIER
3 - PARALLELING TRANSFORMERS (MOUNTED UNDER ITEM 7)
4 - SENSING TRANSFORMERS)
5 - FILTER CHOKE
6 - RELAY
7 - DROOP ADJUST RESISTOR
8 - VOLTAGE ADJUST RHEOSTAT
9 - STABILITY ADJUST
10 - NOMINAL VOLTAGE SETTING
FIGURE 6-2 COMPONENT  LOCATION AND   IDENTIFICATION    SR4 - SR8
33
I
 ©■
CRI3     CRI4
SR8 ONLY
TSI
COMPONENT SELECTION CHART
STABILITY
CIRCUIT
927
R58
P29
C6
C7
■A"  TTPE
SR4-22K
SR8-47A"
2.2K
27K
6
9.5
■B-  TTPE
47«
470
27K
47
4
■E- TYPE
221
470
UK
2
1.5
NOTES
1. VALUES OF   R27,   R26.   R29,   C6   AND C7   VARY,   DEPENDING
UPON  APPLICATION.     (SEE COUPONENT  SELECTION CHART)
2. T3.R24 AND R25 ARE  CONNECTED AS SHOHN  BY  DOTTED
LINES,   (HEN SUPPLIED FOR PARALLEL OPERATION.
3. THREE  PHASE UNITS ARE   SUPPLIED Ml TH   TRANSFORMERS
Tl   AND  T2.
SINGLE  PHASE UNITS ARE  SUPPLIED WITH   TRANSFORMER
Tl   ONLY.
4. CONNECTIONS TO SENSING TRANSFORMER (S) DEPEND ON
SENSING VOLTAGE DESIRED.
5. ILL RESISTANCE  IS  IN OHMS.
I.    ALL CAPACITANCE   IS   IN MICROFARADS.
FIGURE 6-3   SCHEMATIC   DIAGRAM   SR4 AND  SR6
Baalar Electric
34
 n/»i  in
 SINGLE PHASE
SENSING
r©_©n
|    LajuJ    I
!f|!
^©J
<
©^
(lTW
©*
"©-
SR voltage regulator
SENSING
VOLTAGE
(SEE NOTE 1)
THREE PHASE
SENSING
El        E2 E3 F +
.AAJU   UJUL.
FIELD
POWER
(SEE NOTE 2
~1
-rTYinrry-
6 AUTO   o-
-j-Ot-oOFFo-tO-
I I j I	
(NOTE 5) ,      o MAN   O-
L_°
■zt
SEE
NOTE
VOLTAGE
ADJUST
(SEE NOTE 4)
7 6 4 3
INPUT
POWER
(SEE NOTE 5)
FUSE
(15A.250V)
?
PARALLEL
COMP
(SEE NOTE 6)
LcSo-m UNIT-PARALLEL
! I SWITCH
CT1
^dJLjjTgj-
(NOTE 6)
MANUAL VOLTAGE
CONTROL  RHEOSTAT
m.
(NOTE 2)
(p\ rYYYYYrrYY-v_^T\
<5^
BRUSH TYPE EXCITER
FIGURE 6-5 INTERCONNECTION - BRUSH TYPE ROTARY EXCITER
5.
b.
 NOTES	
SENSING  VOLTAGE
Determine  regular  sensing   input   by  model   number.
(See  Table  1-4)     The  transformer   (s)   shown   are
not   required   if  the generator   voltage matches
the  regulator   sensing..     Terminals   E1   and  E3  are
used   for   single phase  sensing  and  E1,   E2,   and  E3
for  three   phase  sen sing.     Refer   to  para.   3.2.2
for   additional   information.
FIELD  POWER
The   full    load   requirements  of   the   field  to  which
the   regulator   is  connected must  not   exceed 440
watts   for   the  SR4,   and 860  watts   for   the  SR8.
The DC   resistance of  the   field must  not  be  less
than  90   for   the  SR4,   and  18(1  for   the  SR8.     Resistance must   be  added   in   series  with   the   field   if
less  than   the  values above.     Refer  to  para.   3.2.3
for  additional   information.
MANUAL-AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The  generator   voltage  can   be controlled manually
on   a  brush   type  rotary   exciter  with   a manual   control   rheostat   and   a  DPDT  three-position   transfer
switch   (these   items not   furnished).     The  transfer
switch,   center  off  position,   allows  removal   of
field  excitation   (voltage   shutdown).     Current
supplied   through   the   regulator   A-terminal   allows
field   forcing   during   short-circuit   or   overloads.
See  para.   3.2.4.2   for   additional   information.
VOLTAGE  ADJUST
This   rheostat   is   furnished with   the   regulator.
Refer   to  para.   4.4.3   for   additional   in formation.
INPUT  POWER
The   input  power may   be  connected   line  to   line,
line   to  neutral   or   to  any   generator  winding   that
provides   the  correct  voltage.     This  voltage must
be  120V   for   the  SR4  and  20*   or   240V   for   the SR8.
A matching   transformer must  be used   if   the
correct   voltage   is not  available  at   the generator
An    isolation    transformer must  be  used   if   the
field  or   field   flashing  circuit   is  grounded.
Refer   to   Table  1-2   for   input  VA  ratings.     Refer
to  para.   3.2.5   for   additional   input   power   infor-
mati on.
PARALLEL  COMPENSATION
Determine  that   the   regulator has  parallel   provisions  by  model   number   (See Table  1-4).     The
current   transformer  (CT1,   5  Amps,   25VA  secondary)
is  required.     The polarity   shown   is  for L1,  L2,
L3  phase   rotation.     Review para.   2.5   for   importance of   CT  polarity   and  phase   relationship  to
sensing  voltage;   also.additional   parallel   operation   in format i 0;i.
 /****.
LOAD    <
BRUSHLESS  EXCITER
(Py-rrrYy^rrY*vS£\
NOTES
1. SENSING VOLTAGE
Determine regulator sensing input by model number (See Table 1-4).  The transformer (s) shown
are not required if the generator voltage matches
the regulator sensing.  Terminals El and E3 are
used for single phase sensing and El, E2, and E3
for three phase sensing.  Refer to para. 3.2.2
for additional information.
2. FIELD POWER
The full load requirements of the field to which
the regulator is connected must not exceed 440
watts for the SR4, and 860 watts for the SR8.
The DC resistance of the field must not be less
than 9fl for the SR4 and 18(1 for the SR8.
Resistance must be added in series with the field
if less than the values above.  Refer to para.
3.2.3 for additional information.
3. FIELD FLASHING
The regulator contains an internal relay for
voltage build up-, therefore, flashing is seldom
required.  If it is required, refer to para. 4.7
before operation is attempted.
4. VOLTAGE ADJUST
This  rheostat  is  furnished with   the  regulator.
Refer   to  para.   4.4.3   for   additional   information.
5. INPUT POWER
The input power may be connected line to line,
line to neutral or to any generator winding that
provides the correct voltage.  Thi'S voltage must
be 120V for the SR4 and 208 or 240V for the SR8.
A matching transformer must be used if the
correct voltage is not available at the generator.
An isolation transformer must be used if the
field or field flashing circuit is grounded.
Refer to Table 1-2 for input VA ratings.  Refer
to para. 3.2.5 for additional input power infor-
mation.
6. PARALLEL COMPENSATION
Determine that the regulator has parallel provisions by model number (See Table 1-4).  The
current transformer (CT1, 5 Amps, 25VA secondary)
is required.  The polarity shown is for Ll, L2,
L3 phase rotation.  Review para. 2.5 for importance of CT polarity and phase relationship to
sensing voltage-, also-, additional parallel opera'
tion information.
7. VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN SWITCH
This switch allows removal of field excitation.
If a switch is not installed in the switch gear,
it should be temporarily installed in a regulator
input power lead during initial operation.  Before this switch is installed, refer to para.
4.3.
FIGURE 6-6  INTERCONNECTION BRUSHLESS t        Y EXCITER (OR STATIC EXCITER)
 SINGLE PHASE
SENSING
©©_
LOAD
©^
<! ©i1
©*
"©-
SR"VOLTAGE REGULATOR
SENSING
VOLTAGE
(SEE NOTE 1)
THREE PHASE
SENSING
E1       E2        E3        F +       F—     A
TajjJ wjul
FI ELD    _
POWER
(SEE NOTE  2)
~1
pmnnrrr
6   AUTO    o-
-4-
-r—
I I
(NOTE 5)
-j-CV-O 0 F F 0-7O—L-
I      o MAN  O -j-
SEE
NOTE
VOLTAGE
ADJUST
(SEE NOTE 4)
7    6    4    3
INPUT
POWER
(SEE NOTE 5)
FUSE
(15A.250V)
t?
PARALLEL
COMP
(SEE NOTE 6:
i-0-'o-« UNIT-PARALLEL
! SWITCH
(NOTE 6)
MANUAL VOLTAGE
CONTROL RHEOSTAT
./£v
(NOTE 2)
(C\ nr-Y-Y^nrYYYY-v_/4^
o-
BRUSH TYPE EXCITER
FIGURE 6-5 INTERCONNECTION - BRUSH TYPE ROTARY EXCITER
 NOTES	
1. SENSING VOLTAGE
Determine regular sen sing input by model number.
(See Table 1-4)  The transformer (s) shown are
not required if the generator voltage matches
the regulator sensing-  Terminals E1 and E3 are
used for single phase sensing and El, E2, and E3
for three phase sensing.  Refer to para. 3.2.2
for additional information.
2. FIELD POWER
The   full   load   requirements of   the   field   to which
the   regulator   is  connected must  not  exceed  440
watts   for   the  SR4,   and 860 watts   for   the  SR8.
The  DC  resistance of  the  field must  not  be  less
than  9fl   for   the  SR4,   and  18ft   for   the  SR8.     Resistance must   be  added   in   series with   the  field   if
less  than  the  values  above.     Refer  to  para.   3.2.3
for   additional   information.
3. MANUAL-AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The  generator   voltage  can   be  controlled manually
on   a  brush   type  rotary   exciter  with  a manual   control   rheostat   and  a DPDT   three-position   transfer
switch   (these   items not   furnished).     The  transfer
switch,   center  off  position,   allows  removal   of
field  excitation   (voltage   shutdown).     Current
supplied   through   the   regulator   A-termtnal   allows
field   forcing  during  short-circuit  or  overloads.
See  para.   3.2.4.2   for   additional   information.
4. VOLTAGE ADJUST
This  rheostat   is  furnished with  the regulator.
Refer   to   para.   4.4.3   for   additional   information.
5. INPUT  POWER
The   input  power may   be  connected   line  to   line,
line   to  neutral   or   to   any   generator winding   that
provides   the  correct   voltage.     This  voltage must
be 120V  for  the  SR4 and /"08  or  240V  for  the SR8.
A matching   transformer must  be used   if   the
correct   voltage   is not  available  at   the generator
An    isolation    transformer  must   be used   if   the
field  or   field   flashing  circuit   is  grounded.
Refer   to   Table  1-2   for   input   VA  ratings.     Refer
to  para.   3.2.5   for  additional   input  power   information.
PARALLEL  COMPENSATION
Determine  that   the   regulator  has  parallel   provisions   by  model   number  (See  Table  1-4).     The
current   transformer   (CT1,   5  Amps,   25VA  secondary)
is   required.     The  polarity   shown   is   for  L1t   L2,
L3  phase   rotation.     Review para.   2.5   for   importance of   CT  polarity   and  phase  relationship   to
sensing  voltage;   also.additional   parallel   operation   in format i on.
 Figure 6-7, Outline Drawing - Voltage Adjust Rheostat
(P/N 03456)
Figure 6-8, Outline Drawing - Paralleling Rheostat
(P/N 03469)
Baalar Electric
HKKvtand.lW.noU
38
 ATTACHMENT A
GENERATING UNIT DATA SHEET
This data sheet, filled out at the time of installation, will save valuable time under
emergency conditions and will serve as a ready reference for the generator unit
equipment.    The back of this sheet can be used for additional data or records of
maintenance, adjustments, etc.
Unit No.   Location	
Date Installed
Installed            By	
Date in
Service
I.   ENGINE:
Mfg. by
Serial
No.
Model
No.
Type:   Gas
gasoline
 HP cont. at
gas
diesel turbine
RPM
steam
turbine
normally
aspirated
supercharged
turbo-
supercharged
n.    GOVERNOR: Mfg. by
Model
No.
m.    GENERATOR:
Output:
Serial No.
Mfg. by
Serial
No.
Sensing
Model
No.
KV/KVA
CPS
_RPM
P.F.
service
factor
amps
phase
°C rise
delta
Volts
wye
amps
short circuit
parallel
operation
no. of leads
Field:   Load
No
Lo£
volts
Full
amps; Load
volts
amps
Overload
volts
amps; Resistance
cold,
hot
IV.    EXCITER:   Mfg. by
Model
No.
Serial No.	
Type:   Brush type rotary
Output: N/L volts	
Forcing
Field: N/L
KW;
RPM
volts
volts
 brushless rotary	
amps; F/L volts
_amps
amps; F/L volts
static
amps;
Resistance
cold
hot
O
REGULATOR:   Basler Electric Co. Model
with:   Series Boost Option Model No.
RFI Filter Model No.  -_
CT's PT's
Serial
No.
amps;
parallel operation
isolation transformer
BASlfR
^-J^~ aV/»a/A.*». It A IA.O/%
 •»
PUBLICATION CHANGE REQUEST (PCR)
Instructions:
This form is provided for use in advising Basler Electric Company of any
errors, deficiencies or suggested improvements relating to this publication.
Basler personnel will review the PCR and shall take action to have all validated errors and deficient areas corrected at the earliest practical time.
Please mail this form to:      Basler Electric Company
Box 269 Route 143
Highland, Illinois   62249
Identification of Requesting Activity
Company Name       	
Department 	
Address
Publication Data:
Title
Number Date
•
Exact identification of area in which change is requested.
Page No. Paragraph No. Figure No. Table No. Other
Description of Requested Change 	
Items below this line for use by Basler Electric Company
PCR evaluation
□ Not Validated-No Action Required
P Validated
Error/Deficiency is Considered:
□ Minor.    It can be corrected at the next routine revision.
D   Significant.    Correction should be expedited.
□ Critical.   Personnel injury or equipment damage could result.
Correction must be accomplished immediately.
Recommended Action or Comments:	
    ~ (3-27-74)
fc^^ Basltr Electric
—J Highland, WnoU
 INSTRUCTIONS       FOR       INSTALLATION      AND      OPERATION
Reverse-Power Relays
Type CH 90
for Use with Alternators
BROWN   BOVERI
AK 90018 E
Supersedes A 15091
(6.69-1500)
Disposal to third persons or reproduction,
even in part prohibited
Printed in Switzerland
 Contents
Page
1. Application
1
2.  Design and function
1
3.  Relay settings
1
4.  Installation
2
5. Taking into service
2
6. Testing with test switch
3
7. Service and maintenance
3
8. Action on breakdown
3
9. Technical data
4
Appendix
5
"
 Reverse-power relays
type CH 90 for use with alternators
1. Application
The duty of the reverse-power relay type CH 90
is to disconnect the alternator in the event of a
fault in the prime mover (e.g. failure of steam
supply) and to prevent the generator from running
on the mains as a motor. It protects the turbine
which, if it were to be driven by the generator
acting as a motor, would run the risk of overheating
and thus being damaged. The relay picks up when
active power flows from the system to the
generator.
2. Design and function
output of the machine. The relay is therefore
normally set to 1% of its rating. The contact
mechanism has a scale graduated from 1-5% of the
rated power of the relay. (This power = rated
current x rated voltage of the relay.) See Fig. 1 and
2, items 5 and 6. Special designs graduated
between 0.75 and 3.75% are also obtainable for
hydrogen-cooled units.
Generators driven by gas turbines, when running
as motors, draw a much higher power from the
system, e. g. over 10% of the power of the
machine, since the compressor must be driven as
well. In this case relays are used which have a
setting range of 5-25% of the rated power and
which are generally set to 5% (see Fig. 3 and 4,
items 5 and 6).
The measuring system of the relay employs Ferraris
principle and has an aluminium drum with two
pairs of coils displaced by 90°. One pair of coils
carries a phase current, the other the voltage
between the two other phases. The measuring
position of the CH 90 relay is 90° leading. This
means that from this current, only the component
which is 90° ahead of the voltage is effective.
Connected in the manner described it measures
active power.
If active power flows from the system towards the
generator, the movement of the relay is to the right
as seen from the front and the contact is closed.
This contact either actuates a retarded contactor
type PA housed in the relay casing, or a separate
time-lag relay type CSM2. The latter gives the
impulses for tripping or signaling. The pick-up value
of the relay is set on a graduated scale with a
pointer, which varies the tension in the contact
spring, see Fig. 1 and 2.
3. Relay settings
a) Pick-up power
Generators driven by steam or water turbines,
when running as motors, draw active power from
the system equivalent to a few per cent of the
b) Correction of measuring position by sliding
resistor (7, Fig. 1 and 2)
This correction can only be carried out with the
sensitive relays having a setting range of 0.75-
3.75% or 1-5%. The measuring position of the
relay can be varied approximately between 88 and
84° by shifting the slider of the resistor to right or
left of its zero position. In the position corresponding to the 0 mark the measuring position of the
relay is 90° leading. See also Fig. 1 and 2, item 7,
and the section on 'Taking into service".
c) Retarding the pick-up of the relay
The auxiliary contactor type PA5 has a setting scale
(see Fig. 1-4, item 11) graduated between 1 and 5 s;
the time-lag relay type CSM2 has a range of
0-15 s.
This time-lag should be at least 1 s longer than the
operating time of the short-circuit protection of the
machine, since the reverse-power relay may pickup in the event of phase-to-phase short circuits
(badly distorted vector diagram) or hunting in the
system, but in these cases it must not bring about
an interruption. As regards the protection of the
turbine, these times are negligible since trouble only
begins to get serious after a matter of minutes.
1
 4. Installation
The place where the relay is mounted must be free
from moisture, dust, acid vapour, etc. The air must
be able to circulate freely round the relay. The relay
may not be mounted in the doors of switchboards,
or in places where it will be exposed to vibration.
Take care to install the relay in a vertical position.
The relay casing may be adapted for surface or
flush mounting by shifting the position of a
mounting frame. For surface mounting with front
connection (see drawing) an additional frame is
fitted to the casing, containing the terminal block
with 4 or 8 terminals, according to the circuit, and
the connecting leads to the terminals inside the
relay. The number of the relay's circuit diagram is
given on the rating plate of the relay (item 8,
Fig. 1-4).
carefully with a dry cloth. The roller of the contact
lever should rotate freely.
c) To check the auxiliary contactor type PA
Press in the armature by hand; the contacts must
close or open cleanly on expiry of the time-lag and
the signal flag must appear. When the armature is
released it must return to its original position and it
must be possible to reset it by depressing the
button. If the signal flag does not stay in its set
position, the small leaf spring behind the rating
plate of the contact should be adjusted.
Technical data: See instructions No. AK 95002 E.
d) To check the separately mounted time-lag relay
CSM2
See instruction booklet AK 90032 E
5. Taking into service
Disconnect the lead to the tripping mechanism of
the generator breaker. If during the test the relay
contact remains closed for more than 1 or 5 min,
the voltage must be removed from the auxiliary
contactor PA5, since this unit is not intended to be
switched in for long periods.
A. Mechanical check of relay
(before energizing)
a) Spindle
The rotary system must turn freely in its bearings,
and when given a light push with an insulated
object, such as the tip of a pencil, must return
easily to its original position. The friction at the end
of the contact lever should not exceed 0.01 g. The
spindle must have axial play of 0.1-0.2 mm. In the
event of the play exceeding this figure, adjust by
means of the upper bearing screw (see Fig. 1 and
4).
If the auxiliary supply is connected, the contactor
PA or the time-lag relay CSM2 should pick-up when
the relay contact is closed.
e) To check the connections
See the accompanying wiring diagram
Special attention must be paid to the polarity of the
current and voltage transformers, and the auxiliary
supply, also check for phase agreement and
examine the rotating field. If it is necessary to test
the polarity of the instrument transformers, this can
be done as instructed in the appendix.
B. To test with generator running
Measure current, voltage and auxiliary voltage:
reconnect the lead to the tripping mechanism of the
generator breaker.
b) Contact system
The clearances and tensions are set correctly in the
works and must not be altered without good
reason.
The contact lever must not stick to the stop. If
necessary the points of contact should be cleaned
a) To check the direction of the power at the relay
The generator is synchronized, connected to the
system and lightly loaded. If the polarity of the
connections is correct, the relay should produce a
strong torque against the stop on the left, which
can easily be detected by lifting the contact lever.
 a
b) To check the effectiveness of the reverse-power
protection
Shed load from the turboset until it is at no-load.
Then completely cut off the supply of steam or
water to the turbine. It is often not sufficient
merely to shut off the steam by means of valves,
because the latter are not always tight and the
leakage steam helps to drive the set, which then
draws less power from the system than it ought.
This phenomenon becomes apparent when the
contact of the relay starts to hunt. The relay must
pick-up and, after the set time-lag, the breaker must
be tripped and the correct signals given.
Next, disconnect the tripping circuit and repeat this
test. After shutting off the steam or water, increase
the excitation of the generator to its maximum
(overload excitation). The attracted relay must not
fall back anywhere in the range. Should the relay
fall back during these test, it means that the supply
of reactive power in the system, caused by the
increased excitation, produces a component in the
direction of the active power at the relay, due to
angular error in the current transformer. This
reduces the active power at the relay when the
set runs as a motor and can thus cause the relay to
fall back. In this case the relay must be set on its
maximum sensitivity and, where necessary, the
resistance for correcting the measuring position
shifted lightly to the left until the relay no longer
falls back anywhere in the excitation range of the
generator.
With gas-turbine sets, c. t. angular error can be
ignored on account of the much greater power
involved when running as a motor. Therefore in
such cases the relay possesses no correcting
resistor.
On completion of these tests, reconnect the tripping
circuit, then by pushing the relay contact to the
right check the response of the time-lag relay and
tripping of the breaker.
PA contactor or CSM2 relay the lamps should light
up. An additional lamp indicates that the relay is out
of service during the test. When turning the switch
back from the test to the service position, wait in
the intermediate position so as to give the relay a
chance to fall back properly. This arrangement can
be used to test the relay at any time and check its
readiness for action.
7. Service and maintenance
a) Pick-up signal of the PA contactor or CSM2 relay
can be reset by means of the resetting button of the
relay. If the signal flag is not reset this does not affect
the operation of the relay.
b) Periodical test with test switch should be carried
out every month as under 6.
c) The reverse-power relay CH 90, the PA contactor
and the CSM2 relay require no maintenance.
Above all-do not oil.
8. Action on breakdown
A large number of Brown Boveri reverse-power
relays type CH 90 have been operating successfully
for many years in a wide variety of generating
stations, without any trouble. If, during service,
irregularities are nevertheless observed, the cause of
which cannot be found in the installation, notify the
supplier, giving the following information:
«'
6. Testing with test switch
(if provided)
The test switch is used to switch over the tripping
and indicating leads to lamps, in the intermediate
and test positions. In the latter position an external
voltage and current is applied to the relay from a
test transformer (often common to several relays)
via test resistors. On expiry of the time-lag of the
1. Circuit of the protective system.
2. Data of the instrument transformers and
auxiliary supply.
3. Manner in which relay operates and other
observations.
4. Works serial number, type and connection of the
relay(s) as given on the rating plate(s).
5. Settings of relay and auxiliary contactor or time-
lag relay.
 9. Technical data
Rated voltage
V
100,110
Rated currents
A
1 or 5
Rated power (voltage x current)
VA
100 (110) or 500 (550)
Pick-up power
(% of rated)
hydrogen-cooled alternators
steam turbosets
gas-turbine sets
%
0.75-3.75
1- 5
5-25
Measuring position
"el
90° leading
Correction of measuring position for relays
with pick-up power of 0.75-3.75% and 1-5%
°el
+4
-2
Consumption:                              Current circuit
Relays 0.75- 3.75%   )
Relays 1     - 5     %   j
Relays 5     -25     %
Voltage circuit
Relays 0.75- 3.75%
Relays 1     - 5     %
Relays 5     -25     %
VA
VA
VA
VA
VA
3.5
4.5
4.5
12
3.6
Contact ratings
Rated current
Max. making current
Max. breaking current
resistive at 110 V
inductive at 110 V
A
A
A
A
5
3
0.45
0.35
Test voltage 50 c/s
V
2000
 Appendix
c
To check polarity of instrument transformers
BROWN BOVERI
The terminals K and L of current transformers
(u and v in the case of voltage transformers) are
connected to a d.c. supply of, say, 4 V with the
polarity shown, while a polarized voltmeter is
connected to terminals k and I (or U and V) as
shown above. If the polarity conforms to that
prescribed, the voltmeter should give a brief positive
deflection when the switch S is closed. (When the
switch S is opened there should be a brief negative
deflection.)
In such instruction booklets it is impossible for us
to cover every possible eventuality which may be
experienced with technical equipment in service.
We therefore ask you to consult us or our local agents
regarding any incident to which the instructions
contain no reference.
 Reverse-power relay type CH 90
with setting range 1-5°/o for protection of generators
/(
BROWN BOVER
BROWN BOVERI
Fig.1
Fig. 2
Legend for Fig. 1-4
1 Magnet frame
2 Spindle of measuring system
3 Upper bearing with temperature
compensation
4 Contact
5 Scale for setting pick-up power
6 Setting lever
7 Correcting resistor
8 Rating plate
9 Auxiliary contactor
10 Retarding mechanism of auxiliary contactor
11 Scale for setting time-lag of auxiliary
contactor
12 Signal flag
€
6
 Reverse-power relay type CH 90
with setting range 5-25°/o for protection of generators
3    2
/Fm
* .   •■ ■''
i
BROWN BOVERI
BROWN BOVER
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Some typical circuits showing reverse-power
relay type CH 90 used for protecting generators
(!
AK 328101 Protection of an alternator, built-in
PA contactor.
AK 328370 Protection of an alternator, separate
CSM2 relay.
AK 328103 Protection of a gas-turbine set,
built-in PA contactor.
   

Cite

Citation Scheme:

        

Citations by CSL (citeproc-js)

Usage Statistics

Share

Embed

Customize your widget with the following options, then copy and paste the code below into the HTML of your page to embed this item in your website.
                        
                            <div id="ubcOpenCollectionsWidgetDisplay">
                            <script id="ubcOpenCollectionsWidget"
                            src="{[{embed.src}]}"
                            data-item="{[{embed.item}]}"
                            data-collection="{[{embed.collection}]}"
                            data-metadata="{[{embed.showMetadata}]}"
                            data-width="{[{embed.width}]}"
                            async >
                            </script>
                            </div>
                        
                    
IIIF logo Our image viewer uses the IIIF 2.0 standard. To load this item in other compatible viewers, use this url:
http://iiif.library.ubc.ca/presentation/cdm.chungtext.1-0362629/manifest

Comment

Related Items